2005 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents

2005 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................4

Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................7Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................59Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Features.........................................................................................................................................................187How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................277What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................291The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................313The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................355This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................383ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................397A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................401How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Information Provided by:

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Odyssey. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SHJC00

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE


One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Hondadealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique toyour Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2005 Honda Odyssey was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as ‘‘event data recorders’’or ‘‘sensing and diagnostic modules.’’

Introduction

WARNING:

i


－－

－

－

－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.


Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

AUDIO SYSTEM/REAR ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

FUEL FILLDOOR RELEASE

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

POWERDOOR LOCKSWITCHES

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES

SHIFT LEVERCLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

MIRRORCONTROLS

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKETS

(P.61, 62)(P.71)

(P.137)

(P.182)(P.171)

(P.180)

HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM/(P.188)

(P.279)

(P.280)

(P.199, 230)

(P.294)

CENTER TRAY

(P.168)

(P.163)

(P.169)

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES (P.160)

Seat MemorySwitches

(P.161)

GLOVE BOXES


＊

＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.:

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

5

POWER SLIDINGDOOR SWITCHES

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

CLOCK

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

AUDIO SYSTEM/REARENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM

STEERING WHEELAUDIO CONTROLS

PASSENGERAIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

POWER TAILGATESWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

VSA OFFSWITCH

HORN

(P.142)

(P.139)

(P.228) (P.127) (P.121) (P.183)

(P.126)

(P.33)

(P.227)(P.126)(P.122)

(P.271)

(P.302) (P.199, 230)

PARKING SENSORSYSTEM SWITCH

(P.169)

(P.166)

DRIVER’S PEDALADJUSTMENT SWITCH

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY SWITCHES

CRUISECONTROL(P.264)(P.75)

/

VSA OFF SWITCH(P.302)

MOONROOF


6


－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 166. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 20...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 22

..Seat Belt System Components . 22

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22Automatic Seat Belt

.............................Tensionners . 23...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23

Additional Information About Your.....................................Airbags . 25

......Airbag System Components . 25How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 27........................Advanced Airbag . 29

How Your Side Airbags.........................................Work . 30

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 32

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 33How the Passenger Airbag

...............Off Indicator Works . 33.............................Airbag Service . 34

...Additional Safety Precautions . 35Protecting Children General

................................Guidelines . 36All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 36

All Children Should Sit in a Back...........................................Seat . 37

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 37

If You Must Drive with.....................Several Children . 39

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 39

...Additional Safety Precautions . 40Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 41.......................Protecting Infants . 41

.........Protecting Small Children . 42.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 43....................Installing a Child Seat . 44

...............................With LATCH . 45.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 48

..............................With a Tether . 50...........Protecting Larger Children . 51

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 52..................Using a Booster Seat . 53

..When Can a Child Sit in Front . 53...Additional Safety Precautions . 55

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56...................................Safety Labels . 57

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

7


You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not in the front seat. Infantsand small children should berestrained in a child seat. Largerchildren should use a booster and alap/shoulder belt until they can usethe belt properly without a booster(see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

16

36

315

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

8


Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle’s Safety FeaturesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

9

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(8)(7)

(9)

(9)

(11)

(10)

(1) Safety Cage

(2) Crush Zones

(3) Seats and Seat-Backs

(4) Head Restraints

(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts

(7) Front Airbags

(8) Side Airbags

(9) Side Curtain Airbags

(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners

(11) Door Locks


Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument panelto remind you and your passengersto fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wearyour seat belts

10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.


CONTINUED

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

27

30


Airbags

What you should do:

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11


The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact (see page formore information on how your sidecurtain airbags work).

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

32


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

12


－

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors andtailgate are closed and locked.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doorand tailgate monitor indicator works.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate monitor indicator onthe instrument panel to

indicate when a specific door or thetailgate is not tightly closed.

36 40

67137

CONTINUED

Introduction Close and Lock the Doors Adjust the Front Seats1. 2.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13


If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you extend the adjustable driver’sfoot pedals (Touring model only, seepage ), or investigate whethersome type of adaptive equipmentmay help.

169

149

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.


See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.Adjust the driver’s head restraint so

the back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

152

150


Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.


If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

The center seating position of thethird row has a detachable seat beltanchor that can be unlatched andreleased, to allow the seat to befolded down. See page for how tounlatch and relatch the seat beltanchor.

The plus-one seat on EX models thatcan be installed in the center seatingposition of the second row also has adetachable seat belt anchor.

17


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.


CONTINUED

The front seats and second row seatshave adjustable seat belt anchors. Toadjust the height of an anchor,squeeze the two release buttons, andslide the anchor up or down asneeded (the anchor has fourpositions).

Pull out the anchor latch and thelatch plate from each holding slot inthe ceiling, and pull out the seat beltto extend it.

Insert the hook at the end of theanchor latch into the anchor buckleby lining up the triangle marks onthe anchor latch and buckle. Makesure the belt is not twisted. Push theanchor latch until it locks. Thenfollow the procedure for fastening anordinary seat belt (see page ).16

The plus-one seat on EX model also hasthis type of seat belt.


Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt in theCenter Position of the Third Row

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

RELEASEBUTTONS

LATCHPLATE

ANCHORLATCH

ANCHORLATCH

ANCHORBUCKLE


To unlatch the detachable seat beltanchor before folding down the seat-back, insert the latch plate into theslot on the side of the anchor buckleand allow the seat belt to retract.Place the latch plate and anchorlatch into their holding slots in theceiling.When the seat-back is returned to itsupright position, be sure to latch thedetachable seat belt anchor.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

20


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

18

Using a seat belt with thedetachable seat belt anchorunlatched increases the chanceof serious injury or death in acrash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachable seatbelt anchor is correctly latched.


After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.


If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.



Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

20


Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbagor a side curtain airbag inflates, acup holder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.


Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21


Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you to fasten your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) without fastening your belt, abeeper will sound and the indicatorwill flash. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator will stop flashing butremain on.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.

16

48

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

22


For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions,and they should activate in anycollision severe enough to causefront-airbag inflation.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. Any belt thatis not in good condition or workingproperly will not provide goodprotection and should be replaced assoon as possible.The tensioners can also be activated

during a collision in which the frontairbags do not deploy. In this case,the airbags would not be needed, butthe additional restraint could behelpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

The tensioners are also designed toactivate when sensors detect sideimpact and when your vehicle isabout to roll over (see page ).32

Honda Warranty Information

CONTINUED

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt Maintenance

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23


If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For information on how to clean theseat belts, see page .343

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

24

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.


Your Airbag System includes:

Two SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassengers’ airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceilingabove the side windows. All pillarsare marked ‘‘SIDE CURTAINAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

27

30

32

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

25

(3)

(4)

(1)

(8)

(9)

(2)

(7)(5)

(10)

(6)

(12)

(5)

(4)

(11)

(9)

(11)

(13)

(8) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(9) Front Impact Sensors(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(11) Side Impact Sensors(12) Occupant Position Detection

System (OPDS) Sensors

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Side Curtain Airbag(7) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor (13) Rollover Sensor


A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and automatically turnthe airbag off (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition is in the ON (II) position.

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. These automatically turn offthe passenger’s front airbag ifthey detect an infant or small childmay be in the seat (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags (seepage ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sside airbag has been turned off(see page ).

A rollover sensor that monitorsthe degree and rate your vehiclemay roll over and automaticallydeploy the side curtain airbags andactivate the front seat belttensioners if needed (see page ).

23

33

29

32

33

33

29

32

Additional Information About Your Airbags

26


After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the airbag helps protect yourhead and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed. 33

CONTINUED

How Your Front Airbags Work


riverand

Passenger

Safety

27


Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

It the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe


28


CONTINUED

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. If the sensors detectan infant or small child may be in theseat, the system will automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off.


Advanced Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR


When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

).

If there is no passenger in the frontseat, the airbag will be off. However,the Passenger Airbag Off indicatorwill not come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of thepassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner.

33


How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

30


Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

If the Side Airbag Off Indicatorcomes on (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans into the sideairbag’s deployment path.

33


Side Airbag Cutoff System

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31


If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), this indicator will come onbriefly then go out. This tells you thesystem is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

A rollover sensor monitors thedegree and rate your vehicle may rollover and automatically deploy theside curtain airbags and activate thefront seat belt tensioners (see page

).

In a rollover toward the frontpassenger’s side of the vehicle, bothside curtain airbags will inflate andthe front seat belt tensioners willactivate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

23


In a Side Impact

In a Rollover

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

32


CONTINUED

This indicatoralerts you that thepassenger’s side

airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag is shut offbecause weight sensors detect aninfant or small child may be in thefront passenger’s seat. It does notmean there is a problem with theairbag.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should comeon briefly and then go off (see page

). If it doesn’t come on, stays on,or comes on while driving without apassenger in the front seat, have thesystem checked.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

64


How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.


Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensors tomake sure they are operatingproperly.Any airbag

that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff. However, the indicator will notcome on.

If the indicator comes on with nopassenger in the front, or with anadult in the seat, there may be aproblem with the advanced airbagsystem. Have the vehicle checked bythe dealer as soon as possible.

The Passenger Airbag Off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in a backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.


If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Airbag Service

34


Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact AmericanHonda at 800-999-1009.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.


riverand

Passenger

Safety

35


－

－－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to properly protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

41 5151 55

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

36

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.


－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do thisthe passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system, whichcan automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), please follow theguidelines below.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

51

29

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

37


－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the driver’s andfront passenger’s visors. Please readand follow the instructions on theselabels.

Canadian Models

U.S. Models


38


－

Your vehicle has two rows of backseats where children can be properlyrestrained. If you ever have to carrya group of children, and a child mustride in front:

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

52

13

19

16

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

39


－

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition can accidentally set thevehicle in motion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

Thiswill prevent unintended use of thedoors.

138

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Lock all doors and tailgate whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Use the power sliding door mainswitch to prevent children fromoperating the sliding doors.

Additional Safety Precautions


40


An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theseat-back in the desired position.

Or, it can interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front. Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Infants and Small ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

41


Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any situation, we stronglyrecommend that you install the childseat directly behind the frontpassenger’s seat, move the seat asfar forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

29

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

42

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.


When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two second-row seat and the center seatingposition of the third row.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

45

CONTINUED

Selecting a Child Seat

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

43

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.


Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position, or positions,where the seat will be used.

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

44


Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) in the twosecond row seats and the centerseating position of the third row.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in a second row seat:

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED


Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

RIGID TYPE

LOWER ANCHOR MARKS

LOWERANCHORS


Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint, over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

4.

5.

6.

7.

153


46

FLEXIBLE TYPE ANCHOR


Remove the head restraint, thenroute the tether strap over theseat-back, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Slide the anchor cover to open it,then follow steps 6 and 7 of thesecond row installation (see page

).

Follow steps 1 through 4 of thesecond row installation (see pages

and ).

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in the center seating position ofthe third row:

Unlatch the detachable seat beltanchor and retract the seat belt allthe way into the ceiling. Place thelatch plate and anchor latch intheir holding slots (see page ).

1.

2. 3.

4.

46

45 46

18

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

47


When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

If you intend to install a child seat inthe center seating position of thethird row, make sure the detachableseat belt anchor is securely latched.

1. 2.

3.


Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

48


To remove slack, it may help to putweight on the child seat, or push onthe back of the seat while pulling upon the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is firmly secured. Ifthe child seat is not secure,unlatch the belt, allow it to retractfully, then repeat these steps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

5.4.

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

49


A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe second or the center seatingposition of the third row.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Each second row bucket seat has atether anchorage point at the bottomof the seat-back.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

1.48


Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Second Row Installation

50

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT


Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

The center seating position of thethird row has an anchorage point onthe tailgate sill.

Remove the bead restraint, thenroute the tether strap over theseat-back.

Slide the anchor cover to open it.

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

Follow step 2 and 3 of the secondrow installation.

2.

1.3.

2.

3.CONTINUED

Third Row Installation Protecting Larger Children

Installing a Child Seat, Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

ANCHORAGE POINT


To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

52

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.


A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the state or states where youintend to drive.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far to the rear as possible,and be sure the child is wearing theseat belt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards (see page ) andthat you follow the booster seatmaker’s instructions.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s airbag inflates in amoderate to severe frontal collision,the airbag can cause serious injuriesto a child who is unrestrained,improperly restrained, sitting tooclose to the airbag, or out of position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

37


Using a Booster Seat When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a boosterseat, the child should not sit in front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

52


Physical Size

Maturity

54


This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

Devices intended to improve achild’s comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt can makethe belt less effective and increasethe chance of serious injury in acrash.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

55


Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the tailgate open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.Have the exhaust system inspected

for leaks whenever:If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, adjustthe heating and cooling system/climate control system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

56

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.


These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which is removed bythe owner), contact your dealer for areplacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models only

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

57

RADIATOR CAP

HOOD

DASHBOARD


U.S. models Canadian models

Canadian modelsU.S. models

Safety Labels

58

SUN VISOR

DOORJAMB


This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60

............................Instrument Panel . 61..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 63

.............................................Gauges . 71.............Multi-Information Display . 74

Controls Near the Steering.........................................Wheel . 120

Windshield Wipers and.....................................Washers . 121

Rear Window Wiper and.......................................Washer . 122

.........Turn Signal and Headlights . 122......Instrument Panel Brightness . 125

...............Hazard Warning Button . 126

...............Rear Window Defogger . 126........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 127

.............................Keys and Locks . 128......................Immobilizer System . 129

..............................Ignition Switch . 130.....................Remote Transmitter . 131

....................................Door Locks . 137....................Power Door Locks . 137

............Childproof Door Locks . 138......................................Tailgate . 138

..........................Power Tailgate . 139.................................Sliding Doors . 142

...............................................Seats . 148

..................................Seat Heaters . 160Driver’s Seat Position Memory

........................................System . 161............................Power Windows . 163

.......................................Moonroof . 166...........................................Mirrors . 167

...............................Parking Brake . 169.Adjustable Driver’s Foot Pedals . 169

.........Interior Convenience Items . 170..........Retractable Center Tray . 171

.....................Beverage Holders . 171................Integrated Sunshade . 173

....................Sunglasses Holder . 174................Conversation Mirror . 174

...................................Sun Visor . 175............................Vanity Mirror . 175

...................Rear Compartment . 175Removable Second Row

..................................Console . 176...............In-Floor Storage Area . 177

......................Lower Glove Box . 180

......................Upper Glove Box . 180...........................Center Pocket . 181

........Accessory Power Sockets . 182.......................AC Power Outlet . 182

...............................Interior Lights . 183

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

59


Control Locations

60

AUDIO SYSTEM/REAR ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

FUEL FILLDOOR RELEASE

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

POWERDOOR LOCKSWITCHES

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS SHIFT LEVER

MIRRORCONTROLS

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKETS

(P.61, 62)GAUGES (P.71)

(P.137)

(P.279)

(P.280) (P.182)(P.171)

(P.199, 230)

(P.180)

(P.188)HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM/CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM(P.294)

CENTER TRAY

(P.168)

(P.163)

(P.169)

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES (P.160)

GLOVE BOXES


＊

＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

61

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMINDICATOR

POWER SLIDINGDOOR INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR

DOOR ANDTAILGATE OPENINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

SEAT BELTREMINDERINDICATOR

CHARGINGSYSTEMINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLMAIN INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

(LX and EX models) VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTSYSTEM INDICATOR

FUEL ECONOMYINDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATORLAMP

(P.67)(P.67)

(P.66)

(P.70)

(P.63)

(P.70)

(P.63)(P.64)

(P.69)(P.63)

(P.64)

(P.64)

(P.67)

(P.68)

(P.69)

(P.69)

(P.65)

(P.65)(P.65)

(P.372)

MAINTENANCEMINDERINDICATOR


＊

＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

62

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

FOG LIGHTINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLMAIN INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMINDICATOR

LIGHTS-ONINDICATOR

LOW OILPRESSUREINDICATOR

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN INDICATOR

VSAACTIVATIONINDICATOR

(Touring models)

FUEL ECONOMYINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST SYSTEMINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

SYSTEMMESSAGEINDICATOR

(P.66)

(P.63)

(P.69)

(P.70)

(P.372)

(P.63)

(P.70)(P.69)

(P.64)(P.64)

(P.64)(P.63)

(P.68)

(P.67) (P.65)(P.65) (P.69)

(P.66)

(P.69)

(P.65)

(P.67)


The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

See page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK CHARGINGSYSTEM’’ message in the multi-information display.

On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OILLEVEL’’ message in the multi-information display.

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

This indicator has two functions:It comes on when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). It is areminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If it stays on after you fully releasethe parking brake while the engineis running, or if it comes on whiledriving, there could be a problemwith the brake system. For moreinformation, see page .

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a chime will sound.On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘RELEASE PARKINGBRAKE’’ message in the multi-information display.

1.

2.

371

371372

373Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

63

U.S. Canada


This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Ifit comes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page .

On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAGOFF’’ message in the multi-information display.

On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’message in the multi-informationdisplay.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to ON(II). If it comes on at any other time,it indicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Itreminds you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts. A beeper alsosounds if you have not fastened yourseat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) before fastening your belt, thebeeper sounds and the indicatorflashes. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator stops flashing but remainson.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals. On theTouring model, you will also see a‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ message inthe multi-information display.

32

33

Instrument Panel Indicators

Side Airbag OffIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

64

U.S. Canada


CONTINUED

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

On the Touring model, you willalso see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message in the multi-information display.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’message in the multi-informationdisplay.

For more information, see page .

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II), there is a problem with theVSA system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked. WithoutVSA, your vehicle still has normaldriving ability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). See page

for more information.

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem in theABS; have your vehicle checked at adealer. With the ABS indicator on,your vehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock braking. Formore information, see page .

On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’message in the multi-informationdisplay.

1.

2.

3.

301

301

301

300


Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation IndicatorAnti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65


This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).If it comes on while driving, it meansthat one or more of your vehicle’stires are extremely low on pressure.You will also see a ‘‘LOW TIREPRESSURE’’ message on the multi-information display. The multi-information display will show youwhich tire has lost the pressure andhow much pressure it has lost (seepage ).

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost pressure on the multi-information display, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,have the flat tire repaired as soon aspossible. If two or more tires areunderinflated, call a professionaltowing service (see page ). For

more information, see page .

Your vehicle has Michelin PAX tires.Repair or replacement of PAX tiresmust be done by a Honda dealer oran authorized Michelin PAX systemdealer. For more information, seepage .

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0) without turning off thelight switch, this indicator willremain on. A reminder chime willalso sound when you open the driver’sdoor.

On the Touring model, this indicatoralso comes on when the light switchis in AUTO and the lights turn onautomatically.

303

303

356

381

On U.S. Touring model only On EX and Touring models


Low Tire PressureIndicator

Lights On Indicator

66


This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). It will go off if youhave inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the tailgate or any dooris not closed tightly.

All the lights in the monitor come onfor a few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK LEFT SLIDINGDOOR’’ or ‘‘CHECK RIGHTSLIDING DOOR’’ message in themulti-information display.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). If it comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe power sliding door system. Withthis indicator on, move the mainswitch on the dashboard to the OFFposition, and have the systemchecked by your dealer as soon aspossible. You can still open or closeeach sliding door manually. Formore information on the powersliding doors, see page .

129

142

On EX model only


Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Door and Tailgate Open MonitorPower SlidingDoor Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

U.S. Canada


The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicators do not blinkor blink rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signaling.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message in themulti-information display.When you press the hazard warning

button, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

338


Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Low Fuel Indicator

68

LOW FUELINDICATOR


This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcomes on (see page ).On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’message in the multi-informationdisplay.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II)with the headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.On the Touring model, you will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK DRL SYSTEM’’ inthe multi-information display.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the master button (see page

).On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the daytime running lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. See page

for information on fog lightoperation.

333

264

123

123

125

264

Canadian models only

Canadian models only

Touring model only


Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Cruise Main IndicatorHigh Beam Indicator ‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69


This indicator reminds you that themaintenance main items and subitems will be displayed in theodometer/trip meter display. Seepage for more information onthe maintenance minder.

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message in the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel to seethe message (see page ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

While the engine is operating in itsmost economical range, thisindicator comes on and stays on. Itgoes off when your vehicle usesextra fuel.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

79315

On LX and EX models On Touring modelOn EX with leather and Touring models


System MessageIndicator

Fuel EconomyIndicator

Maintenance MINDERIndicator

70


This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem, see page .369

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

SPEEDOMETER

ODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

FUEL GAUGE

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TACHOMETER

TACHOMETER

TRIP METER

LX and EX models

Touring model

TRIP METERSELECT/RESETKNOB

TRIP METER SELECT/RESET KNOB

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.


The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset button until thetemperature is displayed.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the outside temperaturedisplay by pressing the Select/Resetknob repeatedly.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0.’’Both trip meters will reset if thevehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

If equipped

Gauges

Odometer Outside Temperature IndicatorTrip Meter

72


In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

On the Touring model, the odometer,trip meter, and the outsidetemperature indicator are displayedin the multi-information display. Seepage for more information.

(Odometer/trip meter message)If the system still detects a loose ormissing fuel cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (MIL) comes on.Turn the engine off and check orretighten the fuel cap at least 3 clicks.The MIL goes out after 3 days ofnormal driving once the cap istightened or replaced. If it does notgo out, have your dealer inspect thevehicle. For more information, seepage .

If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears as text in the odometer/tripmeter display after you start theengine. Turn the engine off andconfirm the fuel cap is installed. If itis, loosen the cap, then retighten it atleast 3 clicks. When you restart theengine, the message appears again.To clear the message, press and holdthe select/reset button until themessage is replaced in theodometer/trip meter display.

37277

On LX and EX models

Gauges

Check Fuel Cap Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73


The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably.Others help to keep you aware of theperiodic maintenance your vehicleneeds for continued trouble-freedriving.

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the key, thedisplay shows ‘‘Welcome DRIVER 1’’or ‘‘Welcome DRIVER 2’’ dependingon which remote transmitter wasused last. (The driver’s ‘‘ID’’ isdetected by the transmitter.)

If you use the remote transmitter tounlock the driver’s door, the displayshows ‘‘Welcome DRIVER 1’’ or‘‘Welcome DRIVER 2’’ depending on

which remote transmitter you use,and the driver’s seat moves to theposition stored in that transmitter.

When you turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0) and remove the key fromthe ignition switch, the displayshows ‘‘Goodbye.’’

There are four types of messages;normal display messages, engine oillife and maintenance messages,system messages, and PAX systemwarning messages.

You can also customize some vehiclecontrol settings to your liking withthe multi-information display and thetwo buttons on the steering wheel(see page ).89

On Touring model only Normal Display Messages

Multi-Information Display

74


If you press the INFO button when‘‘AVERAGE SPEED’’ is displayed,the display changes to ‘‘TIREPRESSURE’’ using both segments.This display is a part of tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS). Seepage for more information.

The multi-information displayconsists of an upper segment and alower segment. Each segment candisplay two lines of messages.

In normal display mode, the uppersegment displays trip computer andtire pressures, and the lowersegment displays the compass,odometer, trip meter, outsidetemperature, and engine oil life.

In normal display mode, the upperdisplay is blank when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). Then eachtime you press the INFO button, thetrip computer changes from ‘‘INST.MPG’’ to ‘‘RANGE’’ to ‘‘ELAPSEDTIME’’ to ‘‘AVERAGE SPEED’’ andthen to ‘‘AVERAGE FUEL A’’ or‘‘AVERAGE FUEL B’’ as shown onthe next page.

Pressing the INFO button againbrings the display back to the initialdisplay of the trip computer ‘‘INST.MPG.’’

303

CONTINUED

Multi-Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

75

LOWER SEGMENT

UPPER SEGMENT INFO BUTTON

SEL RESET BUTTON


Messages in the trip computerinclude:

INST. MPG: Your vehicle’scurrent fuel mileage.RANGE: The estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuelremaining in the tank.This distance is estimated fromthe fuel economy you receivedover the last several miles, so itwill vary with changes in speed,traffic, etc.

To reset the values in the tripcomputer, press the Select/Resetbutton, and hold it for about 1second.

AVERAGE FUEL A/AVERAGEFUEL B: Your vehicle’s averagefuel economy since you last resetthe trip computer.

AVERAGE SPEED: The averagespeed you are traveling.

ELAPSED TIME: The timetraveled since you last reset thetrip computer.


76


The initial display in the lowersegment is shown above. Each timeyou press the SEL/RESET button onthe steering wheel, the displaychanges from ‘‘Odometer/TripMeter’’ to ‘‘Outside Temperature/Trip Meter’’ to ‘‘Engine Oil Life’’, andthen back to the initial display asshown in the next column.

In the lower left corner of the display,a compass indicates which directionyour vehicle is pointed.

While a trip meter is displayed, youcan change the display between‘‘TRIP A’’and ‘‘TRIP B’’ by pressingthe Select/Reset knob in theinstrument panel (see page ). Toreset a trip meter, display it, andpress and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number reset to ‘‘0.0.’’

‘‘AVERAGE FUEL A’’ or‘‘AVERAGE FUEL B’’ will bedisplayed when average fueleconomy is selected in the uppersegment depending on which tripmeter (TRIP A or TRIP B) isdisplayed in the lower segment.

72


Trip Meter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77


This shows the remaining life of theengine oil. It shows 100% after theengine oil is replaced and the displayis reset. The engine oil life iscalculated based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions.

When the engine oil life reaches 15percent, the display shows‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ and thecode for the maintenance items to beperformed.

When the engine oil life reaches 5percent, the display shows‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ along withthe same maintenance items.

Have your dealer do the indicatedmaintenance as soon as you see thismessage, and have them reset thedisplay after completing the service.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance or do not reset thedisplay, the message changes to‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when theengine oil life becomes 0 percent.

These messages appear on the multi-information display each time youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

For details on engine oil life andmaintenance messages, refer to page

.

Also refer to page for importantmaintenance safety precautions.

317

314

Maintenance MessagesEngine Oil Life


78

ENGINE OIL LIFE


If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example, the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentmessage with one or more messages.Most of the messages are displayedfor about 5 seconds, and then thecurrent message returns. Somemessages stay on until the problemis corrected.

These messages also trigger theappropriate indicator(s) on theinstrument panel and cause thesystem message indicator to comeon. The system message indicatordoes not go off until the problem(s)are corrected.

Fasten Seat Belt

The following pages describe eachsystem message that can bedisplayed.

In addition to the seat belt reminderindicator in the instrument panel, themulti-information display interruptsthe current display and shows‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ if you donot fasten your seat belt whiledriving. This message remainsdisplayed if you ignore it and do notwear your seat belt while the vehicleis moving.

CONTINUED

System Messages


entsand

Controls

79

SYSTEM MESSAGEINDICATOR


Door and Tailgate Open

If the tailgate or any door(s) is notclosed tightly, the display remindsyou to close the tailgate or thedoor(s) before you start driving.This display continues until youclose the door(s) or the tailgate.Pressing the INFO button on thesteering wheel momentarily changethe display to the normal display, butit will come back after 5 seconds.

Release Parking Brake

If you start driving without releasingthe parking brake, the multi-information display interrupts thecurrent display and shows‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE.’’This message continues, and achime sounds, until you release theparking brake, or the vehicle speedslows down to less than 0.5 mph (0.8km/h).

If you leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door, you will see‘‘REMOVE KEY’’ in the display andhear a reminder beeper.

Remove Key


80

U.S.

Canada


Brake Fluid Low

If the brake fluid level is at or belowthe MIN mark on the side of thebrake fluid reservoir in the enginecompartment, you will see ‘‘BRAKEFLUID LOW.’’ If you see thismessage, have the brake systemchecked by your dealer (see page

).

Check Fuel Cap The CHECK FUEL CAP messageshould go off after tightening thefuel cap, turning the ignition switchoff and on, then driving over 30 mph(48 km/h) for at least 45 seconds.Due to different driving conditions, itmay take a few driving trips to makethe message go off.

If a loose or missing fuel cap was notthe cause of the CHECK FUEL CAPmessage coming on, the messagewill turn off and the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp will come on. If thishappens, have your vehicle checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the fuel fill cap is missing or nottightened properly, you will see‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP.’’ Make surethe fuel cap is installed and tightenedat least 3 clicks.

373

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

81

U.S

Canada


Fuel Low

If the level of the fuel in the tankgets low, you will see ‘‘FUEL LOW’’in the display, and you must refuelsoon. The low fuel indicator in theinstrument panel will also come on.

Washer Fluid Low Passenger Side Airbag Off

If the passenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off, you will see‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’in the multi-information display. Seepage for more information.

If the fluid level in the windshieldwasher reservoir gets low, you willsee ‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ in themulti-information display.

33


82

U.S.

Canada


Check Tire Pressure Warning: Approaching Object

This message, and the indicator tothe left of the message, is a part ofthe parking sensor system. If you areapproaching too close to an object,you will see ‘‘WARNINGAPPROACHING OBJECT’’ in thedisplay and hear a beeper. See page


The following messages indicatevarious problems in your vehicle’ssystems.

If one or more of your vehicle tiresare low on pressure, you will see a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message in the display. See page

for more information on the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS).303

271

CONTINUED

On U.S. Touring model only


entsand

Controls

83


Check TPMS System

If there is a problem with the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, youwill see ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ inthe multi-information display. If yousee this message, have the VSAsystem checked by your dealer (seepage ).

If the engine oil is very low or haslost pressure, you will see ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ in the multi-information display. You will also seethe low oil pressure indicator in theinstrument panel flashing or stayingon. If you see this message, youshould take immediate action sinceserious engine damage is possible.Follow the procedure on page .

Check Engine Oil LevelCheck VSA System

If there is a problem in the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),you will see ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ in the multi-informationdisplay. If you see this message, theTPMS is not monitoring tirepressures. Have the TPMS checkedby your dealer as soon as possible(see page ).

301

303 371



84


Check Charging System

If you see ‘‘CHECK CHARGINGSYSTEM’’ in the multi-informationdisplay, it means the battery is notbeing charged. See page formore information.

Check Emission System

If you see ‘‘CHECK EMISSIONSYSTEM’’ in the multi-informationdisplay, it means one of the engine’semission systems may have aproblem. Have your vehicle checkedby a dealer (see page ).

If there is a problem with the brakesystem, you will see ‘‘CHECKBRAKE SYSTEM’’ in the multi-information display. The parkingbrake and brake system indicator inthe instrument panel will also comeon. See page for moreinformation.

Check Brake System

371

372373

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

85

U.S.

Canada


Check Transmission

If there is a problem with theautomatic transmission, you will see‘‘CHECK TRANSMISSION’’ in themulti-information display. Avoidrapid acceleration, and have thetransmission checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

If there is a problem in the anti-lockbrake system (ABS), you will see‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ in themulti-information display. If you seethis message, have your vehiclechecked by a dealer (see page ).

Check ABS System Check Airbag System

If there is a problem with your frontairbags, side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,automatic seat belt tensioners, orside curtain airbags, you will see‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ in themulti-information display. Take yourvehicle to a dealer as soon aspossible (see page ).

300

32


86


Check Parking Sensor System

If there is a problem with theparking sensor system, the multi-information display shows a‘‘CHECK PARKING SENSORSYSTEM’’ message. See page


Check Left/Right Sliding Door

If there is a problem in the powersliding door, the multi-informationdisplay shows ‘‘CHECK LEFTSLIDING DOOR’’ or ‘‘CHECKRIGHT SLIDING DOOR.’’ See page


If there is a problem with the powertailgate, the display shows ‘‘CHECKPOWER TAILGATE.’’ See page


Check Power Tailgate

271

139

147

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

87

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada


Check DRL System

If there is a problem with theDaytime Running Light (DRL)System, you will see ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ in the multi-informationdisplay. If you see this message,have your vehicle checked by adealer.

For more information, see page .Your vehicle is equipped with theMichelin PAX system. The PAXsystem uses the multi-informationdisplay to show you one of threemessages while you are driving witha flat tire.

356Canadian model only U.S. Touring model only

PAX Warning Messages


88


You can also use the trip meterSELECT/RESET knob in theinstrument panel to select and enteryour selections while the multi-information display is in thecustomizing mode. Turn the knob toselect a setting and press it to enteryour selection.

Use the INFO button on the steeringwheel to see the settings, and theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselections.

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ asdescribed on page .

If you want to change any vehiclecontrol settings, select ‘‘CHANGESETTING,’’ and follow theinstructions on page .

Every time you press the INFObutton, the display cycles from‘‘CHANGE SETTING,’’ ‘‘DEFAULTALL,’’ ‘‘EXIT,’’ and then back to‘‘CHANGE SETTING’’ as shown inthe next column.

You can customize some vehiclecontrol settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,customizing is not possible.

DEFAULT ALLCHANGE SETTING

The first customizing menu is:

To enter the customizing mode, thevehicle must be stopped and thetransmission must be in Park. Pressand hold the INFO button on thesteering wheel for about 3 secondswhile the multi-information display isin its normal message mode.

90

92

Customized Settings


entsand

Controls

89


If you want to set the customizablevehicle control settings to the defaultsetting, press the INFO button onthe steering wheel until ‘‘DEFAULTALL’’ is displayed.

To set the default settings again,press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button againto select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’

If you want cancel ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’press the INFO button, and you willsee ‘‘CANCEL.’’ Press the SEL/RESET button, and the display goesback to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

DEFAULT ALL


90


When DEFAULT ALL is completedsuccessfully, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, and thedisplay will return to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEENTRY.’’

If DEFAULT ALL is not completedsuccessfully, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, then thedisplay goes back to the normalmessage mode. Repeat theprocedure to select DEFAULT ALL.

To exit ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ press theINFO button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’then press the SEL/RESET button.


entsand

Controls

91


You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to yourpreference. Here are the settingsyou can customize.

METER SET UPPOSITION SET UPLIGHTING SET UPDOOR/WINDOW SET UPWIPER SET UP

While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘CHANGE SETTING,’’press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay will change to the initialdisplay of CUSTOMIZE GROUP.Then, each time you press the INFObutton, the display changes as shownin the next column.Press the INFO button until you seethe setup you want to customize, andpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.

Change Setting


92

Press SEL/RESET button


There are four custom settings itemsin the Meter Setup:

LANGUAGE SELECTIONADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAYTRIP A & AVG. FUEL A RESETwith REFUELCOMPASS ZONE SELECTION

While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is displayed,press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then, press theINFO button repeatedly. Each timeyou press the INFO button, thedisplay changes as shown.

To customize a setting, press theINFO button repeatedly until you seethe setting, and press the SEL/RESET button. Then, follow theprocedures described on thefollowing pages.

Meter Setup


entsand

Controls

93


While the multi-information displayis showing ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION.’’Press the SEL/RESET button againto enter the language selection mode.

There are three selectable languages,English, French, and Spanish. Eachtime you press the INFO button, thedisplay changes as shown.

Select the language you want bypressing the INFO button, and pressthe SEL/RESET button to enteryour selection.

Language Selection


94


When language selection issuccessfully completed, the displaychanges to the screen shown abovefor several seconds, then goes backto ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

If you fail to select a languageproperly, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, then thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’ Repeat the setup.

To exit ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION,’’press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and press theSEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

All the messages in the multi-information display will be in thelanguage you selected.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

95


While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to the‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press theINFO button twice, and you will see‘‘ADJ. OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY’’as shown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.The highlighted number is thecurrent adjustment above or belowthe outside temperature. Press theINFO button repeatedly until theappropriate number appears, andpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.

If you sometimes find that thetemperature reading is alwaysseveral degrees below or above theactual temperature, adjust it asdescribed on the following pages.

Outside Temperature DisplayAdjustment


96


When your selection is successfullyentered, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, and thenthe display changes to ‘‘EXIT.’’

If you fail to enter the desiredadjustment properly, you will see theabove display for several seconds,then the display goes back to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat theadjustment.

To exit ‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY,’’ press the INFO buttonuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and press theSEL/RESET button. The displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

97


To cause ‘‘Trip meter A’’ and‘‘Average Fuel Economy’’ to resetevery time you refuel your vehicle,adjust it as described on thefollowing pages.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP’’ of the‘‘CUSTOMIZE GROUP,’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESETWITH FUEL’’ in the lower segmentas shown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.The lower segment changesbetween ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ each timeyou press the INFO button. Enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset with Refuel


98


When your selection is successfullyentered, you will see the abovedisplay for several seconds, and thenthe display goes back to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

If you fail to enter your selection,you will see the above display forseveral seconds, then the displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’Repeat the setup.

To exit ‘‘TRIP A & AVG. FUELWITH REFUEL,’’ press the INFObutton until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ andpress the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

99


While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to the‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘COMPASS ZONE SELECTION’’ inthe lower segment as shown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.The highlighted ‘‘- -’’ display in thelower segment is the zone number; itchanges from ‘‘1’’ thru ‘‘15’’ eachtime you press the INFO button.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone set into the compass, do theprocedure on the following pages.

On models without Navigation SystemCompass Zone Selection


100


Find the zone for your area on themap shown in the next column.

Press the INFO button until you seeyour zone number in the lowersegment. Then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your zonenumber.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

101


If you fail to enter your zone number,you will see the above display forseveral seconds, then the displaygoes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’Repeat the setup.

To exit ‘‘COMPASS ZONESELECTION,’’ press the INFObutton until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ andpress the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZEMENU.’’

When your zone number issuccessfully entered, you will see theabove display for several seconds,then the display changes to‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


102


While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘POSITION SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ asshown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thedisplay changes as shown above.

Each time you press the INFObutton, the display changes between‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK ON’’and ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINKOFF.’’

When ‘‘MEMORY POSITIONLINK’’ is set to ‘‘ON,’’ the driver’sseat moves to the position stored inmemory when you open the driver’sdoor after unlocking it with theremote transmitter.

Refer to page to set the seatposition memory. Also refer to page

for remote transmitter use.135

161

CONTINUED

Position Setup Memory Position Setup


entsand

Controls

103


Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF ’’ by pressingthe INFO button, and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for severalseconds, then the display goes backto ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

If you fail to enter your selection,you will see the above display forseveral seconds, and the display goesback to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’Repeat the setup.

To exit ‘‘MEMORY POSITIONLINK,’’ press the INFO button untilyou see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET button.


104


There are two custom settings in theLighting Setup:

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors and the tailgate. Youcan change the time that the interiorlights fade out.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ as shown above.


Each time you press the INFObutton, the highlighted numberchanges from ‘‘15 sec,’’ to ‘‘30 sec,’’and then to ‘‘60 sec.’’

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIMEHEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

While the ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ isdisplayed, press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel. Thedisplay changes between‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ and ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTOOFF TIMER.’’

CONTINUED

Lighting Setup Interior Light Dimming Time


entsand

Controls

105


Press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil the desired time appears, thenpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.

When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for severalseconds, and then the display goesback to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’


To exit ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME,’’ press the INFObutton until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ thenpress the SEL/RESET button.


106


While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ pressthe SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button to display‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’as shown above.


Each time you press the INFObutton, the highlighted numberchanges from ‘‘0 sec,’’ to ‘‘15 sec,’’ to‘‘30 sec,’’ and then to ‘‘60 sec.’’

Press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil the desired time appears, thenpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.


CONTINUED

Headlight Auto Off Timer


entsand

Controls

107


The headlights, parking lights,taillights, and license plate light turnoff after the selected time when youremove the key from the ignitionswitch and close the driver’s door.

If you fail to enter your selection,you will see the above display forseveral seconds, and the display goesback ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeatthe setup.

To exit ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFFTIMER,’’ press the INFO buttonuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press theSEL/RESET button.


108


There are four custom settings inthe Door and Window Setup:

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR, WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Each time you pressthe INFO button, the displaychanges as shown in the nextcolumn.

AUTO DOOR LOCKAUTO DOOR UNLOCKKEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENTSECURITY RELOCK TIMER

To customize a setting, press theINFO button repeatedly until you seethe setting you want to customize,and press the SEL/RESET button.Then follow the proceduresdescribed on the following pages.

Door and Window Setup


entsand

Controls

109


To customize the auto door lockingfeature, do this:

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. The display changesto ‘‘AUTO DOOR LOCK’’ as shownabove.

Press the SEL/RESET button again,then press the INFO button. Eachtime you press the INFO button, thedisplay changes from ‘‘OFF,’’ to‘‘VEHICLE SPEED,’’ to ‘‘SHIFTFROM P,’’ and then to ‘‘EXIT’’ asshown above.

There are three possible settings:

OFF: The auto door lock isdeactivated all the time.

SHIFT FROM P: The doors lockwhenever you move the shift leverout of P.

VEHICLE SPEED: The doors lockwhen the vehicle speed reaches 10mph (16 km/h).

Auto Door Lock


110


Press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil the desired condition appears,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.



To exit ‘‘AUTO DOOR LOCK,’’press the INFO button until you see‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESETbutton.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

111


To customize the auto doorunlocking feature, do this:

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button once. The displaychanges to ‘‘AUTO DOORUNLOCK’’ as shown above.

Auto Door Unlock


112


Press the SEL/RESET button againto enter ‘‘Auto Door Unlock,’’ thenpress the INFO button. Each timeyou press the INFO button, thedisplay changes from ‘‘OFF,’’ to‘‘DRIVER DOOR with SHIFT to P,’’to ‘‘ALL DOORS with SHIFT to P,’’to ‘‘DRIVER DOOR with IG OFF,’’and then to ‘‘EXIT’’ as shown on theprevious page.


To exit ‘‘AUTO DOOR UNLOCK,’’press the INFO button until you see‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESETbutton.

Press the INFO button repeatedlyuntil the desired condition appears,and press the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.


OFF: The auto door unlock isdeactivated all the time.DRIVER DOOR with SHIFT to P:The driver’s door unlocks whenyou move the shift lever to P.ALL DOORS with SHIFT to P: Alldoors unlock when you move theshift lever to P.DRIVER DOOR with IG OFF: Thedriver’s door unlocks when youturn the ignition switch to LOCK(0).ALL DOORS with IG OFF: Alldoors unlock when you turn theignition switch to LOCK (0). CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

113


When you push the LOCK button onthe remote transmitter, someexterior lights flash, and a beepersounds when you push the LOCKbutton again within 5 seconds toverify that the doors and the tailgateare locked and the security systemhas set (see page ). You cancustomize the exterior lights not toflash and the beeper not to sound.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ as shownabove.

Press SEL/RESET button, thenpress the INFO button.

Each time you press the INFObutton, the display changes to ‘‘ON,’’to ‘‘OFF,’’ then to ‘‘EXIT.’’

Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressingthe INFO button, and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

133

Keyless Lock Acknowledgment


114


When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for severalseconds, and then the displaychanges to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

To exit ‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT,’’ press theINFO button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’then press the SEL/RESET button.


CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

115


If you unlock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitter,but do not open any of the doors orthe tailgate within 30 seconds, thedoors and the tailgate automaticallyrelock and the security system sets.

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.

While the multi-information displayshows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel. Then press theINFO button repeatedly until you see‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ asshown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button, thenpress the INFO button.

Each time you press the INFObutton, the time changes from ‘‘30sec,’’ to ‘‘60 sec,’’ and then to ‘‘90 sec.’’

Security Relock Timer


116


Select the desired relock time bypressing the INFO button, and enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.



To exit ‘‘SECURITY RELOCKTIMER,’’ press the INFO buttonuntil you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press theSEL/RESET button.


entsand

Controls

117


With ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ shown on themulti-information display, press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel. The display changes to‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION’’ asshown above.

Press the SEL/RESET button, thenpress the INFO button.

Each time you press the INFObutton, the display changes from‘‘WITH VEH SPD,’’ to‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ and then to‘‘EXIT.’’

Press the INFO button to select‘‘WITH VEH SPD’’ or‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ and enter yourselection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

When ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ is shown onthe multi-information display, theaction of the windshield wipers canbe changed. To do this, refer to thefollowing procedure.

Wiper Setup Front Wiper Action


118


If you set the front wiper action to‘‘WITH VEH SPD,’’ the front wipersrun intermittently and the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speedwhen the wiper switch is in the‘‘INT’’position. If you set it to‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ the wipers runat regular intervals.

When your selection is entered, youwill see the above display for several

seconds, and then the display goesback to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’

To exit ‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION,’’press the INFO button until you see‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESETbutton.If you fail to enter your selection,

you will see the above display forseveral seconds, and the display goesback to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’Repeat the setup.


entsand

Controls

119


＊

＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

120


REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

CRUISECONTROL

CLOCK

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

AUDIO SYSTEM/REARENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM

STEERING WHEELAUDIO CONTROLS

PASSENGERAIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

POWER TAILGATESWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

VSA OFFSWITCH

HORN

(P.142)

(P.139)

(P.271)

(P.302)

(P.228)

(P.127) (P.121)

(P.122) (P.264) (P.126)(P.227)

(P.33)

(P.126)

(P.199, 230)

(P.183)

PARKING SENSORSYSTEM SWITCH

DRIVER’S PEDALADJUSTMENT SWITCH(P.169)

(P.166)

(P.75)

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY SWITCHES

VSA OFF SWITCH/

(P.302)

MOONROOF


－－－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield Washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at high speeduntil you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The length of the wipeinterval is variedautomatically according tothe vehicle’s speed. Varythe delay by turning theINT TIME ring.

If you turn it to the shortestdelay, the wipers willchange to low speedoperation when the vehiclespeed exceeds 12 mph(20 km/h).

The wipers run at high speed.

The wipers run at low speed.

: Pull the wipercontrol lever toward you andhold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever.The wipers run at low speed,then complete one moresweep after you release thelever.

You can customize some windshieldwiper settings. See page formore information.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

118

On Touring model

MIST:

OFF:

INT

HI

LO

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and WashersInstrum

entsand

Controls

121


－

－

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver’s door.

Rotating theswitch on the left lever to the‘‘ ’’ position turns on the parkinglights, taillights, instrument panellights, side-marker lights, and rearlicense plate lights.

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsAUTO (Touring model only)Headlights onHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights off (Touring modelonly)Fog lights on (Touring modelonly)

Rotate the switch clockwise toturn the rear window wiper ON.Hold past ON to turn the windowwiper on and the window washeron.OFFRotate the switchcounterclockwise to spray thewindow washer without activatingthe wiper.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.

9.

1.

2.

3.4.

Turn Signal

Headlights On

Turn Signal and HeadlightsRear Window Wiper and Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal, Headlights

122


－

－

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

To switch from lowbeams to high beams, push the leftlever forward until you hear a click.The blue high beam indicator willcome on (see page ). Pull it backto return to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams will stay on as long as youhold the lever back.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

To turn on the automatic lighting,turn the light switch to AUTO at anytime. The lights will come onautomatically when the outside lightlevel becomes low (at dusk, forexample). The lights on indicatorcomes on as a reminder. The lightsand indicator turn off automaticallywhen the system senses highambient light.

The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights, allother exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights when itsenses low ambient light.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.

The lights turn off automaticallywhen you turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). To turn them on again,either turn the ignition switch to ON(II), or turn the light switch to .

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingstructures.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or the engine off for along time.

69

CONTINUED

On Touring model

Touring model only

High Beams

Fog Lights

AUTO

HeadlightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

123


＊

＊

＊

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightsgo off. With the driver’s door open,you will hear a lights-on reminderchime.

The lights turn on again when youunlock or open the driver’s door.

On the Touring model, this time ischangeable. See page for how toselect and set the time.

This turns off the headlights,parking lights, taillights, side markerlights, license plate lights, andinstrument panel lights within 15seconds of removing the key fromthe ignition switch and closing thedriver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,then open and close the driver’s door.If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights turn off after10 minutes.

The automatic lighting feature iscontrolled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

107

On EX and Touring models onlyAutomatic Lighting Off Feature

Headlights

124


The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display on theTouring model or in the odometer/trip meter display on LX and EXmodels while you adjust it. It goesout 5 seconds after you finishadjusting.

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights and the highbeam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionswitch off, even if you set theparking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

Headlights, Instrument Panel BrightnessInstrum

entsand

Controls

125

BRIGHTNESS LEVEL

SELECT/RESET KNOB Touring model shown


Push the red button between thecenter air vents to turn on the hazardwarning lights (four-way flashers).This causes all four outside turnsignals and both indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. It shuts off when youturn off the ignition. You have toturn the defogger on again when yourestart the vehicle.

Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

126

LX model EX and Touring models


Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and indicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentInstrum

entsand

Controls

127

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.


These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the glove boxlocked when you leave your vehicleand the valet key at a parking facility. The keys do not contain batteries.

Do not try to take them apart.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks. On EX and Touring models

Keys and Locks

128

MASTERKEYS(BLACK)

VALET KEY(GRAY)

KEYNUMBERTAG

LX modelEX and Touring models

MASTERKEYS(BLACK)

VALET KEY(GRAY)

KEYNUMBERTAG


The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourdealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the immobilizer systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

129


－－

－

－

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from ACCESSORY(I) to ON (II).

START (III)LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

Ignition Switch

130


－

－－

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior lights will flash. When youpush LOCK button twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the doors and the tailgateare locked. You cannot lock thedoors and the tailgate if any door orthe tailgate is not fully closed or ifthe key is in the ignition switch.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Press ittwice to unlock the other doors andthe tailgate. Some exterior lights willflash twice each time you press thebutton. If you do not open any dooror the tailgate within 30 seconds,they will automatically relock.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to attractattention; the horn will sound andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter or turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

Refer to page for how to takecare of your remote transmitter.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights, depending on theirswitch positions, will come on (seepage ). If you do not open anydoor or the tailgate, the lights stayon for about 30 seconds, then go out.If you relock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitterbefore 30 seconds have elapsed, thelights will go off immediately.

135

183

CONTINUED

On LX model

LOCK

UNLOCK PANIC

Remote Transmitter Care

Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

131

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON


＋

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Remote Transmitter

132

SCREW

BATTERY

TAB


－

－

－Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior lights will flash. When youpush LOCK twice within 5 seconds,you will hear a beep to verify that thedoors and the tailgate are locked andthe security system has set.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Press ittwice to unlock the other doors andthe tailgate. Some exterior lights willflash twice each time you press thebutton.

If you do not open any doors or thetailgate within 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock and the securitysystem sets.

If you press the LOCK button andthe PASSENGER’S SIDE SLIDINGDOOR button at the same time forabout 1 second, the LED in theremote transmitter will blink twice,and all doors and the tailgate willunlock simultaneously when youpress the UNLOCK button. Tocancel this feature, press the LOCKbutton and the PASSENGER’S SIDESLIDING DOOR button at the same

time. The LED will blink once.

On the Touring model, you canchange this setting (see page ).

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights, depending on theirswitch positions, will come on (seepage ). If you do not open anydoor or the tailgate, the lights stayon for about 30 seconds, then go out.If you relock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitterbefore 30 seconds have elapsed, thelights will go off immediately.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to attractattention; the horn will sound andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter or turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

116

183

On EX and Touring models

LOCK

UNLOCK

PANIC


entsand

Controls

133

LEDLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON


If the power sliding door MAINswitch on the dashboard is in theOFF position, you cannot open orclose the sliding doors with theremote transmitter.

You can open or close the powertailgate with the remote transmitterwhen the doors are unlocked. Pressand hold the TAILGATE button toopen or close the power tailgate.When the tailgate begins to move,you will hear a beep, and some frontand rear lights will flash.

You can open or close each slidingdoor with the remote transmitterwhen the doors are unlocked. Pushand hold the right button to open orclose the passenger’s side door, andthe left button to open or close thedriver’s side door.

On Touring model only

Opening or Closing the PowerSliding Doors

Opening or Closing the PowerTailgate

Remote Transmitter

134

DRIVER’SSIDE SLIDINGDOORBUTTON

POWER SLIDING DOORMAIN SWITCH

TAILGATEBUTTON

PASSENGER’SSIDESLIDINGDOORBUTTON


Each remote transmitter activatesthe driver’s seat position memorysystem and customized vehiclecontrol settings (see page ).When you open the driver’s doorafter unlocking it with the remotetransmitter, the driver’s seat movesto the positions stored in memory.You will hear two beeps when themovement is completed.

The driver’s seat position memoryactivation (Driver 1, Driver 2) isshown on the back of eachtransmitter. Make sure you storeyour seat position in the memorythat is activated by the transmitteryou normally carry.

You can turn off driver’s seatposition memory activation with theremote transmitter. Press and holdthe LOCK and UNLOCK buttons atthe same time. The LED in theremote transmitter will blink twice.Then release the buttons, and pressthe UNLOCK button.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Most of the customized settings willreturn to the default settings.

To turn it back on, repeat thisprocedure. The LED will come onfor 1 second to indicate the featurehas been turned on.

89


Recalling a Memorized SeatPosition

Remote Transmitter Care


entsand

Controls

135

With Driver 2With Driver 1


＋

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, separate thehalfs by carefully prying on the edgewith a coin. Remove the old battery,and insert a new battery with theside facing up. Snap the two halvesof the transmitter case back together.




Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

136


To lock the doors and the tailgate,press the front of the master doorlock switch on either front door,press the lock tab on the driver’sdoor, or use the outside lock on thedriver’s door.

Pressing the rear of the master doorlock switch will unlock all doors andthe tailgate.

The lock tab on any door locks andunlocks that door.

All doors and the tailgate can belocked from the outside by using thekey in the driver’s door. To unlockonly the driver’s door, insert the key,turn the key, and release it. Theremaining doors and the tailgateunlock when you turn the key asecond time within a few seconds.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. They arenot disabled if the driver’s door isclosed. Pushing the front of themaster door lock switch on the openpassenger’s door will lock all doorsand the tailgate.

Power Door Locks Lockout Prevention

Door LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

137

MASTER DOORLOCK SWITCH

Lock


The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear sliding doors. Each door hasa lock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the outsideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

With the childproof door locks on,automatic operation with the insidedoor handle is disabled.

To open the tailgate, pull the handle,then lift up. To close the tailgate, usethe inner handle to pull it down, thenpress down on the back edge.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.56


LX and EX models

Childproof Door Locks Tailgate


Door Locks

138


The tailgate can be opened andclosed with the remote transmitteror the switch on the dashboard whenboth front doors are unlocked.

The tailgate can also be closed bypressing the button on the tailgate. Ifyou press the button again while thetailgate is closing, you will hear threebeeps, and the tailgate will stopmoving, reverse direction, and stopat the fully opened position.

Press and hold the tailgate button onthe remote transmitter or thedashboard switch for about 1 secondto open or close the tailgate. Eachtime you press the button on theremote transmitter or the dashboardswitch, you will hear a beep.

If you push the same button orswitch again while the tailgate isopening or closing, you will hearthree beeps, and the tailgate will stopmoving, reverse direction, and stopat the fully opened or closed position.

To open or close the tailgatemanually, see page .138

CONTINUED


Power Tailgate

Door LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

139

DASHBOARD SWITCH

TAILGATEBUTTON TAILGATE SWITCH


The power tailgate has an auto-reverse feature. If it meetsresistance while opening or closing,it will beep three times and reversedirection. However, the tailgate maynot reverse immediately. Alwaysmake sure passengers and objectsare clear of the tailgate beforeopening or closing it.

Also check that passengers,especially children, do not have theirhands on the edge of the tailgate oron the tailgate still. The auto reversefeature stops working when thetailgate is about to latch so the motorcan pull the tailgate shut.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, goes dead, or the fuseis removed while the tailgate is fullyopen, the power tailgate needs to bereset. After connecting the batteryor installing the fuse, close thetailgate fully by hand.

The power tailgate may not open orclose under the these conditions:

When the tailgate or the roof iscovered with snow or ice.

Do not install any accessories on thetailgate. It may cause the tailgate notto function properly. If there is snowor ice on the tailgate, make sure toremove it before you operate thetailgate.

If you pull the tailgate release handlewhile the tailgate is opening orclosing, it will stop moving. You needto open or close it the rest of the waymanually.

The tailgate has sensors on bothsides. Be careful not to damage them.If the sensors are damaged, thepower tailgate does not functionproperly.

When the vehicle is swayed in astrong wind.

The vehicle is parked on a steephill.

Auto-Reverse

Door Locks

140

Closing a power tailgate whileanyone is in the path of thetailgate can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure everyone is clearbefore closing the powertailgate.


Push the release lever to the right asshown.

If you need to unlock the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the cover on the back of thetailgate.

If the power door lock system cannotunlock the tailgate, unlock itmanually.

If you try to drive off with thetailgate not closed completely, abeeper sounds and a ‘‘DOOR &TAILGATE OPEN’’ message isshown on the multi-informationdisplay.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

If there is a problem in the powertailgate system, you will see a‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. Have the system checked byyour dealer.

With this message shown in themulti-information display, you canstill open or close the tailgatemanually.

56

CONTINUED


Unlocking the Tailgate


Door LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

141


To open, pull the inside or outsidedoor handle, and slide the door back.It will latch in the fully open position.When opening from the inside, thechildproof door lock must beunlocked.

To close, pull either handle, and slidethe door closed. Make sure the dooris closed and latched securely beforedriving, and all passengers are clearof the sliding doors before closingthem.

If you cannot open the tailgate,remove the cover on the back of thetailgate (see page ). Use the keyto unlock the tailgate as shown, thenpull the outer handle to open thetailgate.

The doors are electrically poweredand can be operated with the remotetransmitter, the door handles, or thedashboard switches. To operate thedoors:

When opening a sliding door, it stopsabout halfway if the window is openmore than 3 in (8 cm). If the vehicleis facing downhill, the sliding doorwill slam shut when you release thedoor handle. Always close thewindow fully before opening thesliding door.

The shift lever must be in Park orNeutral. To operate the doors withthe shift lever in Neutral, theignition switch must be in the ON(II) position with the brake pedalpressed or the parking brakeapplied.

The MAIN switch must be in theON position.

The doors must be unlocked.

141

LX modelOn EX and Touring models

On LX and EX models

Power Sliding DoorsOpening and Closing ManualSliding Doors

Door Locks, Sliding Doors

142


CONTINUED

When the shift lever is in Park:

When the shift lever is in Neutral andthe ignition switch is in the ON position:

If you shift out of Park while a dooris closing, you will hear a beep untilthe door closes.

If you shift out of Park while a dooris opening, you will hear acontinuous tone and the door willstop moving. Stop the vehicle andclose the door.

If you shift out of Neutral or releasethe brake pedal or the parking brakewhile a door is closing, you will heara beep until the door closes.

If you shift out of Neutral or releasethe brake pedal or the parking brakewhile a door is opening, you will heara continuous tone and the door willstop moving. Stop the vehicle andclose the door.

To open the door with the insidedoor handle, pull the handlebackward. Push it forward to closethe door. If you pull backward orpush forward on the door handlewhile a door is opening or closing,the door stops moving. Pullbackward or push forward to open orclose the door fully.

To open or close the door with theoutside door handle, pull the doorhandle. If you pull the door handlewhile a door is opening or closing,the door stops moving. If you pull thedoor handle again, the door will openfully.

The dashboard switches to the leftof the steering column allow you toopen or close the power sliding doors.

The MAIN switch on the dashboardcontrols power to the sliding doors.

Sliding Doors

Door Handles Dashboard Switches

Instruments

andC

ontrols

143

POWER SLIDING DOOR MAIN SWITCH



To open a power sliding door, pushand release the bottom of theappropriate switch. If you forget tounlock the door, you will hear threebeeps. Unlock the door and try again.

To close a sliding door, push andrelease the top of the switch.

To stop a door, push either the top orbottom of the switch. The door willstop and you will hear three beeps.Push the switch again to resumemovement.

When the MAIN switch is in theOFF position, you have to operatethe doors manually.

To open and close a power slidingdoor, press and hold the appropriatebutton for at least 1 second. If youforget to unlock the door, you willhear three beeps. Unlock the door,and try again.

Each power sliding door has an auto-reverse feature. If a door meetsresistance while closing, it will beepthree times and reverse direction.However, the door may not reverseimmediately and may cause somebruising or discomfort. Always makesure passengers and objects areclear of the doors before closingthem.

If a rear window is open more than3 in (8 cm), the power sliding door isdesigned to stop about halfway toavoid accidents. If this happens,close the door with the door handles,the dashboard switch, or the remotetransmitter. Close the window andopen the sliding door. Make sure thewindow is fully closed before youoperate the power sliding door.

To stop movement, push theappropriate door button; you willhear three beeps. Push and hold thesame button again for at least 1second and the door will reversedirection.

Sliding Doors

Remote Transmitter Auto-Reverse

144

DRIVER’SSIDESLIDINGDOORBUTTON

PASSENGER’SSIDESLIDINGDOORBUTTON

LED


You can manually open or close thesliding doors. The MAIN switchmust be in the OFF position. Toopen a door, pull the inside oroutside door handle, and slide thedoor back. It will latch in the fullyopen position. To close, pull eitherhandle and slide the door forward.When the door is almost closed, theauto-closer will pull the door shut.

Before operating the sliding doors,check that passengers, especiallychildren, do not have their hands onthe edge of the sliding door or on thedoor pillar. The auto-reverse motorstops working when the door isabout to latch so the auto-closer canpull the door shut.

If there is an obstacle in the door sill,the power sliding door may not openor close properly. When removingthe obstacle from the door sill, makesure to turn off the main switch onthe dashboard.

When replacing a flat tire, make sureto turn off the power sliding doormain switch on the dashboard.

Do not allow anyone to step on thelower arm of the sliding door whilethe door is open. This could damagethe sliding door mechanism.

When you drive with children in yourvehicle, use the childproof doorlocks (see page ). This willprevent children from opening thedoors accidentally.

Do not put any item in the doorpocket sticks out from the pocket. Itcan prevent the doors from openingor closing properly, and damage thevehicle body.

138

On all models


Sliding Doors

Manually Opening/Closing thePower Sliding Door

Important Sliding DoorPrecautions

Instruments

andC

ontrols

145

Closing a sliding door while anypart of a passenger is in thedoor’s path can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all passengers areclear of the doorway beforeclosing a sliding door.


When you release the fuel fill door,the driver’s side sliding doorautomatically locks so it cannot openand interfere with the fuel door. If apassenger attempts to unlock thedoor by cycling the lock knob severaltimes, the door can be opened.

If a passenger needs to get out whileyou are refueling, instruct thatperson to exit on the passenger’sside.

When you close the fuel fill door, thedriver’s side sliding door unlocks if itwas unlocked when you opened thefuel fill door.

If you open the fuel fill door whilethe driver’s side sliding door isopening, the sliding door stops. Ifthis happens, the door must beoperated manually.

When parking facing downhill, makesure the doors are latched in thefully open position, and then hold thedoor open for your passengers. Donot pull the inside or outside doorhandle, or the door will slam shut.

Make sure the main switch on thedashboard is in the ON position.

When parking facing downhill on asteep grade, the power sliding doorsmay not open or close as they donormally.

If you leave the vehicle on a steepdownhill with a power sliding doorhalf open and the engine off, themagnetic lock will turn off after 30minutes and the sliding door willautomatically open or close. In thiscase you will hear a continuous tone.

If your vehicle is facing a downhill,do not turn the main switch to OFFwhile the door is opening becausethe door may slam shut.



Sliding Doors

Refueling Parking on a Hill

146


If the battery is disconnected or goesdead, close the sliding doorcompletely by hand. If it still doesnot operate properly after thebattery is reconnected, have yourvehicle checked by a dealer.

If there is a problem in the powersliding door system, you will see a‘‘CHECK LEFT SLIDING DOOR’’message or ‘‘CHECK RIGHTSLIDING DOOR’’ message in themulti-information display (see page

). If this message stays on, turnthe MAIN switch to OFF, and havethe system inspected by your dealer.

If the power sliding door indicatorcomes on and stays on, there is aproblem in the system. Turn theMAIN switch to OFF, and have thesystem inspected by a dealer.

Each sliding door has a pinch sensoron the front edge. Do not damagethis sensor, or the power sliding doormay not operate properly.

87

On Touring model

On EX and Touring models On EX model

Sliding Doors

Power Sliding Door ProblemsPinch Sensor

Instruments

andC

ontrols

147

PINCH SENSOR POWER SLIDING DOOR INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown


There are bucket seats witharmrests for two front passengers,bucket seats with armrests for twopassengers in the second row, and abench seat for three passengers inthe third row.

For greater cargo capacity, the seatsin the second row can be removed,and the bench seat in the third rowcan be folded into the floor.

The EX model has a stowable secondrow plus-one seat that can beinstalled between the second rowbucket seats when needed. The plus-one seat can also be used as a secondrow center console, or stored in thefloor storage area. For moreinformation, see page .156

Passenger SeatingConvertible Second Row BucketSeats

Seats

148


－

The front passenger’s seat, and theseats in the second and third rowsadjust manually.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

The EX and Touring models have apower adjustable driver’s seat. TheLX model has manual driver’s seatadjustments.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

To adjust the bucket seats in thesecond row, pull up the bar on thefront of the seat bottom.

The third row seats do not adjustforward and backward.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

13 15

CONTINUED

Manual Seat Adjustments

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

149


To change the seat-back angle of thebucket seats in the second row, pullforward on the lever on the outsideof the seat-back.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up on the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

The left and right halves of the thirdseat-back can be adjusted separately.To adjust the angle, pull theadjustment strap on the outside ofeach seat-back, move the seat-backto the desired position, and releasethe adjustment strap. Let the seat-back latch in the new position.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. Pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe seat bottom or push the leverdown to lower the seat cushion.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

On LX model

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Seats

150

ADJUSTMENT STRAP


－

Moves the seatforward andbackward.

Raises or lowers theseat.

The controls for the adjustabledriver’s power seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat back angle.

Moves the front ofthe seat up or downand the rear of theseat up or down.

Adjusts the seat-back angle forwardor backward.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

On EX and Touring models13 15

Power Seat Adjustments

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

151


See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.


15

On EX with Leather and Touring models

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

An armrest is located on each of thefront seats and on each side of thesecond row seats. Pivot it down touse it. When you remove the bucketseats in the second row, pivot thearmrests up out of the way.

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

The angle of the armrest on eachfront seat is adjustable. Pivot thearmrest down, and pull it up to thedesired angle.

Head RestraintsArmrestsDriver’s Lumbar Support

Seats

152


To get into or out of the third rowseat, walk between the second rowseats.

When the seat on the passenger’sside is moved to the center, walkthrough the passenger’s side to getinto or out of the third row seat.

All head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down. On the Touring model, you need to

remove the second row consolebefore you can make this seatadjustment.

CONTINUED

Third Seat Access

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

153

RELEASEBUTTON


Unlock the seat from the floor bypulling the lock release lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge andlifting the rear of the seat.

Slide the seat toward the center ofthe vehicle.

The second row bucket seat on thepassenger’s side can be moved to thecenter to provide access to the thirdrow seat.

To get into or out of the third rowseat, pull up the release lever on theshoulder of each second row bucketseat. The seat-back will tilt forwardand the whole seat will slide forward.

Push the back of the seat down overthe floor hooks. Make sure the seatis securely locked in place.

Remove the piece mat and the floorcover from under the passenger’sside bucket seat. To remove thepiece mat, unfasten the two buttonson the rear edge.

Moving the Second Row BucketSeat

Seats

154

LOCKRELEASELEVER

BUTTONS

PIECE MAT


Both seats can be removed to givemore cargo capacity.

To remove a seat:

Make sure the seat is securelylocked in place before driving. A seatthat is not locked in place could flyaround and cause injury in a suddenstop or crash.

Reverse this procedure to move theseat back to the outside.

When the passenger’s side bucketseat is in the outside position, andthe plus-one seat or the second rowconsole is not used, install the floormat and the piece mat over thecenter floor anchors between thebucket seats. Make sure to fastenthe buttons on the mat to the floor.

Install the floor covers over the outerfloor anchor and install the piece matover the floor cover. Insert the tabson the piece mat into the slit on thefloor. Fasten the buttons on the matto the floor. Pull up the seat-back angle

adjustment lever, and fold the seat-back forward.Unlock the seat from the floor bypulling the lock release lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge andlifting the rear of the seat.

Seats

Removing the Bucket Seats in theSecond Row

Instruments

andC

ontrols

155

LOCK RELEASE LEVER

PIECE MAT

SLIT COVER

TABS


You can install the stowable plus-oneseat between the second row bucketseats.

To reinstall the seat, hook the frontof the seat to the floor, then push theback into the locks. Make sure boththe front and the back of the seat aresecurely latched before driving.

Unhook the front of the seat fromthe floor by pulling it back slightly,then pivoting it upward.

Always remove an unsecured seatfrom the vehicle before driving. Aseat that is not locked in place couldbe thrown about and cause injury ina sudden stop or crash.

On EX model only

Seats

Installing the Stowable SecondRow Plus-One Seat

156


CONTINUED

To remove the seat, lower the headrestraint all the way down. Removethe seat cushion by pulling the strapon the seat cushion, and fold theseat-back forward.

To install the stowable plus-one seat,pull the leg folding lever to unfoldthe leg, hook the front of the seat tothe floor, then push down the backuntil it locks. Make sure both thefront and back of the seat aresecurely latched. Pull up the seat-back, and adjust the seat-back angleto the desired position while pullingthe seat-back angle adjustment strapon the outside of the seat bottom.

Install the seat cushion on the seatbottom plate. To install the cushion,hook the front of the cushion first,then push down the rear until thecushion is securely positioned.

To use the plus-one seat as a centerconsole, remove its seat cushion bypulling up the seat cushion strap.Then pivot the seat-back forwarduntil it is flat. Store the seat cushionin the floor storage area.

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

157

ANGLE ADJUSTMENT STRAP


To create more cargo space, you canfold the one-motion third row ‘‘MagicSeat’’ into the floor recess.

Unlatch the detachable seat beltanchor center seat belt, and let thebelt retract all the way into theceiling. Place the latch plate andanchor latch into their holdingslots.

Lower the head restraints fully.

Always remove an unsecured seatfrom the vehicle before driving. Aseat that is not locked in place couldbe thrown about and cause injury ina sudden stop or crash.

The stowable plus-one seat assemblycan be stored in the floor storagearea between the front seats and thesecond row seats. To do this, removethe Lazy Susan from the floorstorage area.

Unlock the seat from the floor bypulling the lock release lever and theleg folding lever on the bottom of theseat-back, and lift the rear of the seat.Unhook the front of the seat fromthe floor by pulling it back slightly,then pivoting it upward.

1.

2.

Seats

Folding the One-Motion ThirdRow ‘‘Magic Seat’’

158

LOCK RELEASE LEVER

LEG FOLDING LEVER


Pull the seat-back upright with thestrap. Make sure the seat issecurely locked.

To return the seat to the uprightposition:

Pull the seat out of the recess bypulling on the handle. Pivot theseat forward all the way. The frontseat legs will automatically latch.

Pull the handle on each seat-backto unlock the front seat legs.

Pivot the seat into the cargo areafloor recess.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard. Seeon page .

1.

2.3.

4.

286

Seats

Carrying Cargo

Instruments

andC

ontrols

159

HANDLE


Follow these precautions when usingthe seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag system.The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use them. Theseat heater switches are located onthe dashboard above the centerpocket. Push the top of the switch,HI, to rapidly heat up the seat.After the seat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushing

the bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops.

In LO, the heater does not cycle withtemperature change.


Seat Heaters

160


Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat position.

Two seat positions can be stored inseparate memories. You select amemorized position by pushing theappropriate button or appropriateremote transmitter (Driver 1 orDriver 2).

Press and release the MEMObutton on the control panel. Youwill hear a beep. Immediatelypress and hold one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) until you hear twobeeps. The indicator in thememory button will come on. Thecurrent driver’s seat position isnow stored.

Store a driver’s seat position onlywhen the vehicle is parked.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).You cannot add a new seatposition in memory unless theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. You can recall amemorized position with theignition switch in any position.

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

1.

2. 3.151

CONTINUED

On Touring model only Storing a Driver’s Seat Position inMemory

Driver’s Seat Position Memory SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

161

MEMO BUTTON

MEMORY BUTTONS


Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat position.

Each memory button stores only oneseat position. Storing a new positionerases the previous position stored inthat button’s memory. If you want toadd a new position while retainingthe current one, use the othermemory button.

To select a memorized position, dothis:

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

The system will move the driver’sseat to the memorized position. Theindicator in the selected memorybutton will flash during movement.When the adjustment is complete,you will hear two beeps, and theindicator will stay on.To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change theseat position after it is in itsmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this seat position forlater use, you must store it in thedriver’s seat position memory.

Shift out of Park.

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.

Press any button on the controlpanel: MEMO, 1, or 2.

1.

2.

Selecting a Memorized Position

Driver’s Seat Position Memory System

162

MEMORY BUTTONS


－

－

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

To open/close the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down or up to the seconddetent, and release it. The windowwill automatically go up or down allthe way. To stop the window, pull/push on the window switch briefly.

If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger windows cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)to raise or lower any window. Toopen the window, push the switchdown to the first detent and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Pull back on theswitch and hold it to close thewindow.

CONTINUED

AUTO

AUTO REVERSE

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

163

MAIN SWITCHDRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.


Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.

To open the windows further,press the button again and hold it.If the windows stop before thedesired position, repeat steps 1and 2.

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO REVERSE function will bedisabled. The power window systemneeds to be reset after reconnectingthe battery or installing the fuse.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

You can open all of the windowsfrom the outside with the remotetransmitter.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.


Opening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter

Power Windows

164


Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows start toopen. To stop the windows,release the key.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within15 seconds).

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows start to close. To stop thewindows, release the key.

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within15 seconds).

If the windows stop before thedesired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To open:

You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Opening/Closing the Windowswith the Key

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

165

Open

Close


To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the top of the switch( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the bottom of theswitch ( ).

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither front door. You must thenturn the ignition to ON (II) for themoonroof to operate.

The moonroof can be tilted up in theback for ventilation, or it can be slidback into the roof. Use the switchunder the left dashboard vent tooperate the moonroof. You mustturn the ignition switch to ON (II)for the moonroof to operate.


Moonroof

166

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.


Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

1.

2.

CONTINUED

On Touring model

On LX and EX models

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

167

SELECTOR SWITCH


Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

To apply the parking brake, push theparking brake pedal down with yourfoot. To release the parking brake,push on the pedal again. The parkingbrake indicator on the instrumentpanel should go out when theparking brake is fully released withthe engine running (see page ).

3.

63


Mirrors

Parking Brake

168

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL


You can adjust the position of thebrake pedal, and accelerator pedalwhen the shift lever is in the Parkposition. Push the top of theadjustment switch to move thepedals forward, and the bottom tomove them backward.

To adjust the pedals:

Push and hold the top of theadjustment switch until pedals areclosest to you.

Adjust your seat and the steeringwheel so you can operate thecontrols and steering wheel easily.

Push and hold the bottom of theadjustment switch until pedals arein the position you can press themfully and comfortably.

Do not adjust the pedals with yourfoot on or under either pedal.

1.

2.

3.


Parking Brake, Adjustable Driver’s Foot Pedals

Adjustable Driver’s Foot Pedals

Instruments

andC

ontrols

169

PEDAL POSITIONADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles.


＊＊

Interior Convenience Items

170

BEVERAGE HOLDER

VANITYMIRROR

CENTERPOCKET

ACCESSORYPOWERSOCKET

REARCOMPARTMENT

COAT HOOK SUN VISOR

ACCESSORYPOWERSOCKET

: Touring model only

SUNGLASSESHOLDER WITHCONVERSATIONMIRROR

LOWERGLOVE BOX

UPPER GLOVEBOX

REMOVABLE SECONDROW CONSOLE

RETRACTABLECENTER TRAY

BEVERAGEHOLDER

BEVERAGEHOLDER

IN-FLOORSTORAGE


Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

To use the retractable center tray,pull up the outside edge of the trayuntil it latches. To store it, pull thelever and lower the tray.

Sitting on or getting under the tray,or putting heavy objects on the tray,may damage or deform it.

Do not keep items on the tray whiledriving. They may fall down or flyaround when you go around cornersor brake hard.

CONTINUED

Beverage HoldersRetractable Center Tray

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

171


To protect the beverage holder, thebottom tray is designed to breakaway if you try to place a heavyobject on it. If this happens, hold theedge of the bottom tray and pull it upuntil you feel a detent.

Be careful not to damage an openbeverage holder when you get intoor out of the vehicle.

The beverage holders for the thirdseat passengers are in the armrestson the rear side panels.Each second row seat has a

beverage holder on the outside ofthe seat cushion. To use thebeverage holder, push on the tab.The beverage holder will swing open.To close, pivot it up and push it inuntil it latches.

To use the front beverage holder,pull the handle.

Additional beverage holders for thefront seat passengers are in theretractable center tray.


172

TAB


The removable second row consolehas a beverage holder on the front.

To use the beverage holder, push onthe front lid. The lid will swing open.To close, lower the lid, and push itdown until it latches.

Each rear sliding door has anintegrated sunshade. To use asunshade, hold the tab on the topand pull the sunshade all the way up.Insert the holes on the sunshade intothe hooks on the window frame. Tostore the shade, unhook it, and let itretract all the way down.

The sunshades are intended for useonly when the windows are fullyclosed. If a window is opened, theshade can be blown off its hooks. Asthe shade automatically retracts, itcould hit and hurt anyone sitting tooclose to the window.

On Touring modelOn EX and Touring models

Integrated Sunshades


entsand

Controls

173

HOOK

TAB


To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

The sunglasses holder uses a convexmirror for its bottom panel. You cansee all the vehicle passengers on thismirror. To use the mirror, open thesunglasses holder, push it to the firstdetent, and release it.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.


Sunglasses Holder Conversation Mirror


174

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

Push


Pull up the vanity mirror cover to useit. The lights come on only when theparking lights are on.

To open the compartment, pull thelever and lift the lid. To close, lowerthe lid and push it down until itlatches.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out. In thisposition, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

The vanity mirror light will not comeon if the sun visor is slid outward.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Rear Compartment


entsand

Controls

175

REAR COMPARTMENT LEVERSUN VISOR


There is a removable consolebetween the second row bucketseats.

To remove the console, pull up thetab at the front edge to unlock therear of the console from the floor.

To reinstall the console, hook thefront of it to the floor, then pushdown the back until it locks. Makesure the console is securely locked inplace. A console that is not locked inplace could fly around and causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash.

If you remove the second seat centerconsole, store it in a safe placeoutside the vehicle.

Unhook the front of the consolefrom the floor by pulling it backslightly, then pivoting it upward.

To open the console, push the tab,and slide the lid to the rear.


Removable Second Row Console


176

TABTAB


There is a large storage area underthe floor between the front seats andthe second row bucket seats.

To place or remove large items fromthe storage area, pull off the carpetnear the second seat, and pull thehandle to open the large lid.

To place or remove small items fromthe storage area, pull off the carpetin the center of the lid, and pull thehandle to open the small lid.

On EX and Touring models, thishandle can be locked with themaster key.

To keep the lid open, attach the hookto the grab rail on the back of thefront seat-back.

You can adjust the length of thehook strap. Pull down the upperedge of the stopper, and slide it up ordown.

CONTINUED

In-Floor Storage Area


entsand

Controls

177

HANDLE

HOOK

LID HANDLE


You can store items in the floorstorage area up to 22 lbs (10 kg). Donot exceed this weight limit, or youmay damage the floor storage area.

The inside of the storage area canget very hot. Do not store any itemsthat should be kept cool, or itemsthat can be easily damaged, warped,or deformed by heat.

Dust, sand, etc., can accumulate inthe floor storage area. If you spillliquid on the floor around the floorstorage area, it can get inside thestorage area, and the moisture canbe trapped inside. Always keep theinside of the storage area dry andclean.

To prevent items from being thrownabout the vehicle and possiblyhurting someone in an accident orsudden stop, be sure the storagearea lids are securely closed beforedriving away.

To lock the small lid, open the largelid, and turn the lock knob clockwise.


178


On EX and Touring models, the floorstorage area has a Lazy Susan insidewhich makes it easier to find itemsthrough the small lid.

The Lazy Susan can be removed.When it is removed, a larger item,such as the stowable second rowplus-one seat, can be stored.

To remove the Lazy Susan, open thelarge lid. Attach the hook to the grabrail on the back of the front seat tokeep the lid open. Hold the twohandles on the edge of the LazySusan, and pull it out of the storagearea. Store the removed Lazy Susanin a safe place outside the vehicle.Do not place it on the vehicle floor orseat, or in the cargo area. It can flyaround the interior in a crash.

The Lazy Susan can be damaged if itis kept in a humid place. Alwaysstore the Lazy Susan in a dry placewhen it is removed.


entsand

Controls

179

STOWABLE SECOND ROWPLUS-ONE SEAT

LAZY SUSAN

HANDLE


Open the upper glove box bypressing the button. The lid willswing open. Close it with a firm push.

Open the lower glove box by pullingthe bottom of the handle. Close itwith a firm push. Lock or unlock theglove box with the master key.


Lower Glove Box Upper Glove Box

180

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxesclosed while driving.


Open the center pocket by pullingthe handle. Close it with a firm push.

On vehicles without navigationsystem, there is another pocketunder the heating and coolingsystem control panel. Pull the handleto open it. Close it with a firm push.

Center Pocket


entsand

Controls

181

Vehicles without RES Vehicles with RES


There are three accessory powersockets in your vehicle. Twoaccessory power sockets are abovethe center pocket for the front seatpassengers, and another is on thecargo area sidewall on the driver’sside.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When more than onesocket is being used, the combinedpower rating of the accessoriesshould be 120 watts or less(10 amps).

There is a 115 volt AC power outletin the rear compartment on thedriver’s side. To use the AC poweroutlet, open the rear compartmentlid and open the outlet cover. Insertthe plug into the receptacle slightly,turn it 90° clockwise, then push inthe plug all the way.

Always run the engine when you usethe AC Power Outlet.

Accessory Power Sockets AC Power Outlet


182


The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows cannot beturned on.

The cargo area light can be turnedon with the switch in the light.

DoorActivated

The light control switch has threepositions: OFF, Door Activated, andON.

OFFNone of the lights come on when adoor or the tailgate is opened.

The individual map lights in thefront can be turned on and off bypressing the lenses.

The maximum capacity for thispower outlet is 115 volt AC at 100watts or less. If you use an appliancewhich requires more than 100 watts,it automatically stops supplying thepower. If this happens, turn theignition switch off and turn it onagain.

The AC power outlet is notdesigned for electric applianceswhich require high initial peakwattage such as cathode-ray tubetype televisions, refrigerators,electric pumps, etc. It is also notsuitable for devices that processprecise data such as medicalequipment or measuring instruments.Any appliances that require anextremely stable power supply suchas microcomputer-controlled electricblankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,should not be connected to thisoutlet.

The individual map lights in thefront come on when any door isopened. When the doors areclosed, each light can be turned onand off by pressing the lenses.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows come onwhen any door is opened. Whenthe doors are closed, each lightcan be turned on and off bypushing on the lens.

When the switch is in theposition:

When this switch is in the position:

CONTINUED

Light Control Switch

Interior Convenience Items, Interior LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

183

NOTE:

ON DOORACTIVATEDPOSITION

OFF

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH


Turn on the front and rear individualmap lights by pushing the lens ofeach light. Push the lens again toturn it off. You can also operatethese lights with the light controlswitch (see page ).

The lights go out about 30 secondsafter all the doors and the tailgateare closed. They go out immediatelyafter all doors are locked.

With the light control switch in theDoor Activated position, all theindividual map lights come on whenyou unlock the door with the remotetransmitter (see page ).

With any door or the tailgate leftopen, the lights stay on about 3minutes, then go out.

ONAll the individual map lights comeon and stay on as long as theswitch remains in the ON position.

183

133

When the light control switch is in theposition:

On EX and Touring models Individual Map Lights

Interior Lights

184

FRONT


The ignition switch light comes onwhen you open the driver’s door, andstays on several seconds after youclose the door.

The cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the OFF position,the light does not come on. In thecenter position, it comes on whenyou open the tailgate. In the ONposition, it stays on continuously.

Ignition Switch LightCargo Area Light

Interior LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

185

OFFON

REAR


The courtesy lights in the frontdoors come on when you open anydoor.

The courtesy light between the maplights comes on when you turn theparking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.

Interior Lights

Courtesy Lights

186


The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them. (If you selected anoptional audio system, refer to theoperating instructions that camewith it.)

The heating and air conditioningsystems in your vehicle provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 188Using Automatic Climate

...................................Control . 193.........Using the Rear A/C Unit . 194

...................Rear Climate Control . 197..............Climate Control Sensors . 198

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 199............AM/FM Radio Reception . 205

...Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 207..................................Playing a CD . 212...................................CD Changer . 215

....................Protecting Your CDs . 221.....CD Changer Error Messages . 222

...............................Playing a Tape . 223.............Steering Wheel Controls . 228

.................Radio Theft Protection . 229........Rear Entertainment System . 230

..............................Playable DVDs . 258............................Security System . 263

...............................Cruise Control . 264HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 267................Parking Sensor System . 271

.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 275

FeaturesF

eatures

187


Vents, Heating, and A/C

LX model

EX/Touring models

188

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTON

MODECONTROLDIAL

MODEBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

AUTOBUTTON

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

REARCONTROLLERDIAL

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

REARBUTTON

REAR LOCKBUTTON

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

OFF BUTTON

SYNCHRO BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROLSWITCH

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

REAR TEMPERATURE/FAN SPEED (EX model)CONTROL SWITCH


▲

▼

▲

▼

Turn the dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Turn thedial counterclockwise to decrease it.

Press the button to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease it.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

The driver’s side temperature andthe passenger’s side temperature canbe set separately. On the Touringmodel, the rear passengercompartment temperature can alsobe set separately. Press the top ( )of the appropriate temperaturecontrol button to increase thetemperature of airflow. Press the

bottom ( ) of the button todecrease it. Each set temperature isshown in the display. When you turnthe A/C off, the system cannotregulate the inside temperature ifyou set the temperature controlbelow the outside temperature.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit or its upper limit, it will bedisplayed as ‘‘Lo’’ or ‘‘Hi’’.

When you press this button, theindicator in the button comes on, andthe passenger’s side temperature(and the temperature of the rearpassenger compartment on theTouring model) is synchronized tothe driver’s side set temperature.Changing the passenger’s sidetemperature (or the temperature ofthe rear passenger compartment onthe Touring model) makes theindicator to go off, and takes the

system out of SYNC mode.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. On the LXmodel, the indicator in the button ison when the A/C is on. On the EXand Touring models, you will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

CONTINUED

LX model

LX model

EX and Touring models




Fan Control

Temperature Control

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

SYNC Button

Features

189


Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).

Use the mode control dial or buttonto select the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.The passenger’s temperature cannotbe set separately from the driver’s.

When you want to change thetemperature of the rear passengercompartment, press the REARbutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on, and you can change thetemperature using the reartemperature control button. Whenyou press the REAR LOCK button,the indicator in the button comes on,the rear A/C passenger controlpanel is disabled, and you cannot

change any settings from it.See page for how to operate therear passenger control panel.

You can change the fan speed of therear system from the front controlpanel. Press the REAR button, theindicator in the button comes on.Push the rear fan control button upor down to increase or decrease therear fan speed. When you press theREAR LOCK button, the indicator inthe button comes on, and the rearpassenger control panel is disabled.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard.

See page for how to operate therear passenger control panel.

196

197126


On LX model only

On EX model


Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

REAR/REAR LOCK Button

190


CONTINUED

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red mark,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

Press the A/C button. Theindicator in the button comes on(LX model) or ‘‘A/C ON’’ is shownin the display (EX and Touringmodels) when a fan speed isselected.

Make sure the temperature is setto the lower limit.

Select .

If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear sidepanels.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial orbuttons.

Set the temperature control dial orbutton to the lower limit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.2.3.

1.

2.3.4.

71

If the interior is very warm,


Using the A/CVentilation

Using the Heater

Features

191


Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows: Select . The system

automatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

The indicator in the A/C buttonwill not come on (LX model), orthe A/C ON indicator will notcome on (EX and Touring models).Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.This setting is suitable for all driving

conditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Switch the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

Set the fan to high.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to the freshair mode and turns on the A/C.

The indicator in the A/C buttonwill not come on (LX model), orthe A/C ON indicator will notcome on (EX and Touring models).

Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.

Select to help clear therear window.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel next to each vent.This will send more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

1.2.3.4.

1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.3.

On U.S. vehicles

On U.S. vehicles


Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

192


If you set the temperature to itslower or its upper limit, the systemruns at full cooling or heating only. Itdoes not regulate the interiortemperature.

Press the Auto button. Theindicator in the button comes on.

Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control button.You will see AUTO in the system’sdisplay. You can set the driver’sside temperature and passenger’sside temperature (and thetemperature of the rear passengercompartment on the Touringmodel) separately. The systemautomatically selects the propermix of conditioned and/or heatedair that will, as quickly as possible,raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

When you press a fan control button,the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left,and turn the rear controller dial toOFF position.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

Press the OFF button and REARbutton (indicator is off).

1.

2.

LX model


EX, and Touring models


Using Automatic Climate Control To Turn Everything Off

Semi-automatic Operation

Features

193


－

－

You can adjust the airflow of the rearA/C unit with the rear controller dialon the front control panel. The rearpassengers can also adjust thedirection and the amount of airflowon the rear control panel.

No air flows to the rearvents, and the rear control panel isturned off.

The rear A/C passengercontrol panel is enabled. A secondrow passenger can then adjust thefan speed, airflow, and temperature.Turning the rear controller dial tothe right increases the rear fanspeed.

When you select a fan speed with therear controller dial, the rear controlpanel is disabled.

You can adjust the temperature ofthe rear A/C unit with the REARbutton and the rear temperaturecontrol button on the front controlpanel. LX model

LX and EX models

Touring model


Using the Rear A/C Unit

OFF

Rear Controller Dial ON

194


－

－

－When the

indicator in this button is off, no airflows to the rear vents, and the rearcontrol panel is turned off. When theindicator in this button is on, thetemperature of the rear passengercompartment can be adjusted withthe rear temperature control button.A second row passenger can alsoadjust the temperature, fan speed,and airflow.

When theindicator in this button is on, the rearcontrol panel is disabled, and therear system is controlled by the frontcontrol panel.

When theindicator in this button is off, no airflows to the rear vents, and the rearcontrol panel is turned off. When theindicator in this button is on, the fanspeed of the rear passengercompartment can be adjusted withthe rear fan speed control button. Asecond row passenger can alsoadjust the temperature, fan speed,and airflow.

Touring modelEX model


REAR Button

REAR LOCK ButtonREAR A/C Controls

REAR Button

Features

195


You can use the rear control panelwhen the rear controller dial on thefront control panel is in the ONposition.

Turn the rear temperature controldial clockwise to increase thetemperature of the airflow.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the rear floor vents.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the rear ceiling vents.

Select the vents the air flows fromwith the mode control dial.

Turn the fan speed control dialclockwise to increase fan speed andairflow.

When is selected, airflow isdivided between the rear floor ventsand rear ceiling vents.You can use the rear control panel

when the indicator in the REARLOCK button on the front controlpanel is off.

When you press the CTRL button inthe left dial, the indicator comes on,and the fan speed is regulated by theouter ring of the fan control dial.

LX model EX model

Rear Control Panel


196

LX model EX model


▲

▼

▲

▼

You can use the rear control panelwhen the indicator in the REARLOCK button on the front controlpanel is off.Press the top ( ) of thetemperature control button toincrease the temperature of airflow,and the bottom ( ) of the button todecrease it. The temperature youadjust is shown in the system display.

Press the top ( ) of the fan controlbutton to increase the fan speed andairflow. Press the bottom ( ) of thebutton to decrease it. The level ofthe fan speed is shown in the display.

Each time you press the modebutton, the mode display changesfrom , to , then to

.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the rear ceiling vents.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the rear floor vents.

Pressing the AUTO button puts thesystem in automatic operation mode.The rear system automaticallyadjusts the fan speed and airflowlevels to maintain the selected

temperature of the rear passengercompartment.

Pressing the OFF button shuts offthe rear climate control system.

When is selected, airflow isdivided between the rear floor ventsand rear ceiling vents.

Touring model

Rear Climate ControlF

eatures

197

TEMPERATUREBUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTON

Touring model


The direction and quantity of airflowfrom each rear ceiling vent isadjustable.

To adjust the direction of air comingfrom a rear ceiling vent, move thetab in the center of each vent back-and-forth, and rotate the vent withthe tab. The lever next to each ventcan be opened and closed to regulatethe amount of airflow.

The climate control system has threesensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. There is also a rearsensor on the rear sidewall near theexhaust vent. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

Rear Ceiling Vents

Rear Climate Control, Climate Control Sensors

198

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSORTAB

LEVER


Playing the AM/FM Radio

LX model EX model without RES

Features

199

PWR/VOLKNOB

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

SCANBUTTON

SEEK BAR

PWR/VOLKNOB

FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

SEEK BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

SOUNDKNOB

TUNE KNOB

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

AUTO SELECTBUTTON



EX and Touring models withRES without Navigation System

Touring model with RES andNavigation System

200

PWR/VOLKNOB

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

SEEK BARPWR/VOLKNOB

SEEK BAR

AM/FM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

SCANBUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

AUTO SELECTBUTTON


－

－

＋－

－

－

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button, or AM/FM button. Onthe FM band, ST will be displayed ifthe station is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction in AM is notavailable.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate itpress the or side of the bar,then release it.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM, and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about 5 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 5 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

TUNE

SEEK Preset

To Select a Station

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT

To Play the AM/FM Radio

SCAN

Playing the AM/FM RadioF

eatures

201


－

－－

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN functions to find stations, thenstore them in the preset buttons asdescribed.

Press the SOUND (TUNE) knobrepeatedly to display the bass (BAS),treble (TRE), balance (BAL), andfader (FAD) settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the SOUND(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting toyour liking. When the level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’ inthe display. The system willautomatically return the display tothe selected audio mode about 5seconds after you stop adjusting a

mode.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

To turn off Auto Select,

Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/FaderAUTO SELECT


202


－

－

In addition to the knobs and buttonson the radio control panel, you canoperate some of the radio controlson the navigation system screen.

While you are listening to the radio,you can change to another band bypressing the AUDIO button next tothe navigation system screen, andthen touching the desired band icon

(FM1, FM2, or AM).

You can also adjust the sound fromthe navigation screen.

To adjust the sound, push theAUDIO DISPLAY button, then enterthe sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display.

AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SEEKare adjustable from the navigationscreen. For an explanation of thesefunctions, see pages and .

Touch theAUTO SELECT icon to activate theauto select function. You will seeAUTO SEL flashing in the upperdisplay.

Touch the SCAN icon toactivate the scan function. You willsee SCAN in the display. Touch theicon again to deactivate it.

202201

CONTINUED

On models with Navigation System

Operating the Radio on theNavigation System Screen

AUTO SELECT

SCAN

Adjusting the Sound

Playing the AM/FM RadioF

eatures

203

AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON


－

－－＋

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

These modes adjustthe strength of the sound comingfrom each speaker. Left/Rightbalance adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while Front/Rear faderadjust the front-to-back strength. Toadjust the left/right balance, touchthe ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon.

To adjust the front/rear fader, touchthe ‘‘FR’’ or ‘‘RR’’ icon.

To adjust the trebleand bass, touch or on eachside of the treble or bass adjustmentbar. The adjustment bar shows youthe current setting.

To see the audio display when youare finished adjusting the sound,wait 5 seconds.

125

Audio System LightingLeft/Right Balance and Front/Rear Fader

Treble/Bass


204


CONTINUED

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio ReceptionF

eatures

205


Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception

206


Playing the XM Satellite RadioF

eatures


EX model without RES EX and Touring models withRES without Navigation System

207

PWR/VOL KNOB

PWR/VOLKNOB

PWR/VOLKNOB

XM RADIOBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON XM RADIOBUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE KNOB

CATEGORY BARCATEGORY BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

PRESETBUTTONS

TUNE KNOBXM RADIOBUTTON

TUNE KNOB

PRESETBUTTONSSCAN BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON


－

On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Satellite Radioanywhere in the United States,except Hawaii and Alaska.XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.The navigation system screen alsoshows all XM information when theAUDIO button is pressed.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II). Push the PWR/VOLknob to turn on the audio system,and press the ‘‘XM’’ button. Adjustthe volume by turning the PWR/

VOL knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

You can also change to the XM radiowhile you are listening to an FMstation, AM station, CD, etc., bytouching the XM1 or XM2 icon onthe audio display (navigation systemscreen).

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.

In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:Channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

U.S. EX and Touring models only

MODE

Operating the XM Radio

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

208


－

－－＋

－

－

On models with a rear entertainmentsystem and a navigation system, youcannot listen to XM Radio and a discat the same time. For example, whenXM Radio is playing on the frontspeakers, you cannot listen to a discon the rear speakers, or vice versa.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN/RPT button ortouch the SCAN icon on the audiodisplay. The system plays eachchannel in numerical order for a few

seconds, then selects the nextchannel. When you hear a channelyou want to continue listening to,press the button or touch the iconagain.

Press either side ofthe bar ( or ) to select anothercategory.

In the category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In the channel mode, all channels

can be selected.

Use the TUNE knob, or theCATEGORY or SCAN buttons totune to a desired channel. You canalso touch the SCAN icon on theaudio display.

Press the XM RADIO button.Either XM1 or XM2 will show inthe display.

To store a channel:

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons or preset icons on the audiodisplay. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

The presets will be lost if yourvehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button(icon) to tune to it.

Press the XM RADIO button againor touch the other XM icon (XM1or XM2) on the audio display.Store the next six channels usingsteps 2 and 3.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

Turn the tune knob left orright to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.


SCAN

CATEGORY

Preset

TUNE

Features

209


The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.


210

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER


Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in the tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the XM RADIObutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,and you’ll be able to listen to XMradio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom the activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service

Playing the XM Satellite RadioF

eatures

211


＋

－＋

－

Playing a CD, CD Changer


212

AMBUTTON

FMBUTTON

CD SLOT

EJECTBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

CD BUTTON

DISCBUTTON

DISCBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON DISC

BUTTON

DISCBUTTON

CD BUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

SEEK BAR

LOADINDICATOR

AM/FMBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

SEEK BAR

RANDOMBUTTON

CD SLOT


＋

－

＋－

Playing a CD, CD ChangerF

eatures


EX and Touring models withRES without NavigationSystem

213

SEEK BAR

EJECTBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

CD BUTTON

DISCBUTTON

DISCBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

LOADINDICATOR

LOADBUTTON CD SLOT

SEEK BAR

DISC BUTTONDISC BUTTON

LOADINDICATOR

LOADBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

CD BUTTON


＋

－

＋－

－

－

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way and begin to play it. Youoperate the CD player with the samecontrols used for the radio. Thenumber of the track playing is shownin the display. The system willcontinuously play a CD until youchange modes.

Each time you press and release theside of the SKIP bar, the player

skips forward to the beginning of thenext track. Press and release theside of the SKIP bar to skipbackward to the beginning of theprevious track.To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSKIP bar. You will see CUE or REWin the display.

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press the RPT button againto turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks in random order. To activateRandom Play, press and release theRDM button. You will see RDM inthe display. This continues until youpress the RDM button again.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 15 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

Press the AM or FM button toswitch to the radio while a CD isplaying. Press the CD button to playthe CD.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the CD will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

LX modelCD Player To Change Tracks (SKIP)

REPEAT

RANDOM

To Stop Playing a CD

Playing a CD, CD Player

214

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.


CONTINUED

Your audio system has an in-dashCD changer that holds up to six CDs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.

To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

The CD changer is behind thenavigation system screen. To use theCD changer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the CD changer appears.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the OPEN buttonagain. Do not use the folded screenas a tray. If you put a cup, forexample, on the screen, the liquidinside the cup may spill on thescreen when you go over a bump. Press and hold the LOAD button

beside the CD slot until you see‘‘LOADING’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

1.

On vehicles with navigation system

On vehicles with navigation systemEX and Touring models


Operating the CD Changer Loading CDs in the Changer

Features

215

OPEN BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.


To load a single CD:

The indicators above the Discbuttons of the empty positions willblink, and the green load indicatorabove the CD slot comes on.

Press and release the LOADbutton.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

If you press the LOAD button whilea CD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate Disc button.Select an empty Disc button (theindicator above the button is off),and press the button. The systemwill stop playing the current CD andstart the loading sequence. It willthen play the CD just loaded.

Insert a CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

When LOADING appears again inthe display, insert the next CD intothe CD slot.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the first CD loaded.

The indicators above the Discbuttons of the empty positions willblink, and the green CD loadindicator comes on. When you see‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, insert thedisc into the CD slot. Insert it onlyabout halfway; the drive will pull itin the rest of the way.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for 10 seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

2.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

3.


216


On vehicles without navigation systemTo load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

Press and hold the Load buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

On the upper right side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinking,and the green CD load indicatorwill come on.

Insert the CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD Loaded indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

To load a single CD:

Press and release the LOADbutton.

When the disc number for anempty position starts to blink andthe green CD load indicator comeson, you will see LOAD in thedisplay. Insert the disc into the CDslot. Insert it only about halfway,the drive will pull it in the rest ofthe way.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the LOAD buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for ten seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

When LOAD appears again in thedisplay, insert the next CD into theCD slot.

1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.2.

3.

Playing a CD, CD ChangerF

eatures

217


－＋

＋

－

－

＋

－

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSKIP bar. You will hear a beep andthe system will continue to movethrough the track. Press the sideof the SKIP bar to move forward, orthe side to move backward.Release the bar when the systemreaches the point you want.

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

When that CD ends, the next CD inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last CD finishes, thesystem returns to CD 1.

You can use the SKIP bar while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks.

To select a different CD, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence.

Each time you press the side ofthe SKIP bar, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release the sideto skip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

On models with a rear entertainmentsystem and a navigation system, youcannot listen to a disc and XM Radioat the same time. For example, whena disc is playing on the frontspeakers, you cannot listen to XMRadio on the rear speakers, or viceversa.


To Play a CD To Change Tracks

218


When you press and release the RPTbutton or touch the TRACK RPTicon on the upper display, the systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. As a reminder, you will seeREPEAT (TRACK REPEAT) in thedisplay. To turn this feature off,press the RPT button, or touch theTRACK REPEAT icon again.

When you press and hold the RPTbutton until REPEAT is in thedisplay, or when you touch the DISCRPT icon on the audio display, thesystem continuously replays thecurrent disc. As a reminder, you willsee D-RPT (DISC RPT) in thedisplay.

When you press and hold the SCANbutton until you see D-Scan in thedisplay, or when you touch the DISCSCAN icon on the upper display, thefirst track of the current CD playsfor about 10 seconds. You will see D-SCAN in the display and DISC SCANin the upper display. To hear the restof the CD, press the SCAN button ortouch the DISC SCAN icon again,within 10 seconds. If you don’t, thesystem advances to the next disc,plays about 10 seconds of it, andcontinues throughout the rest of theCDs the same way. When thesystem reaches the last disc, DISCSCAN is cancelled, and the CD playsnormally.

When you press the SCAN button ortouch the TRACK SCAN icon on theupper display, the first track of thecurrent disc plays for about 10seconds. You will see SCAN in theupper display and in the audiodisplay. To hear the rest of the track,press the SCAN button or touch theTRACK SCAN icon again within 10seconds. If you don’t, the systemadvances to the next track, playsabout 10 seconds of it, and continuesthrough the rest of the tracks thesame way.


Track Repeat

Disc Repeat

Disc ScanTrack Scan

Features

219


When you press the RDM button ortouch the TRACK RANDOM icon onthe upper display, the system playsthe tracks of the current disc inrandom order. You will seeRANDOM (TRACK RANDOM) inthe display. To turn this feature off,press the RDM button (touchTRACK RANDOM) again.Operation of TRACK SCAN, DISCSCAN, TRACK REPEAT, DISCREPEAT, and TRACK RANDOM onthe upper display is possible onlywhen the audio display is in theupright position.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or SATRADIO button (U.S. models). Eachtime you press the AM/FM button,the system changes to the nextmode (AM, FM1, or FM2). Whenyou return to CD mode by pressingthe CD button, play will continue

where it left off.

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the indicatorsabove the disc buttons blink.

To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is on or off:

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

To remove the disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe appropriate disc button orcorresponding number on the presetbutton. When that disc beginsplaying, press the eject button.

If you do not remove the CD fromthe slot, the system will reload theCD after 15 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the CD, press the CD button.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system automatically beginsthe load sequence so you can loadanother disc in that position. If youdo not load another CD, within 15seconds, the system selects theprevious mode [AM, FM1, FM2, orXM Radio (U.S. models)].

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.


Random Play

To Stop Playing a Disc

Removing CDs from the Changer

220


When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the CD changer.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDsF

eatures

221


Message SolutionCauseIf you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

Press the disc eject button, and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourdealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

CD Changer Error Messages

222


Playing a Tape


Features

223

FF BUTTON

SKIP BARPLAY/PROGBUTTON

REWBUTTON

NR BUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

FF BUTTON

PLAY/PROGBUTTON

REWBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

SKIP BAR

NR BUTTON


Playing a Tape


EX and Touring models withRES without NavigationSystem

224

REPEATBUTTON

FF BUTTON

PLAY/PROGBUTTON

REWBUTTON

NR BUTTON

FF BUTTON

PLAY/PROGBUTTON

REWBUTTON

NR BUTTON

SKIP BAR

SKIP BAR


▲

－

＊

＊

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Make sure the open side of the tapeis facing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator willcome on to show you which side ofthe tape is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the PLAY/PROG button.When the player reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will come on in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing theNR button. Dolby remains off untilyou press the NR button again.

To remove the tape, press theEJECT button. If you want to turnthe player off, press the PWR/VOLknob or turn off the ignition. Thetape will remain in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, thetape will begin playing where it leftoff.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press the AMor FM button or AM/FM button, orCD button. To change back to thetape player, press the AUX button.

To rewind the tape,push the REW button. You will seeREW in the display. To fast forwardthe tape, push the FF button. Youwill see FF displayed. Press the FF,REW, or PLAY/PROG button totake the system out of rewind or fastforward.

CONTINUED

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Optional on all modelsTo Play a Tape

To Stop Playing a Tape

Tape Search FunctionsFF/REW

Playing a TapeF

eatures

225


－－

＋

－

Press the side of theSKIP bar to find the beginning of thecurrent song or passage. Press the

side of the SKIP bar to find thebeginning of a song or passage.When the system reaches thebeginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape in

the player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

The SKIP and REPEATfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

SKIP Caring for the Tape and Player

REPEAT

Playing a Tape

226

NOTE:


If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock. You can quickly set the time to the

nearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing andholding the CLOCK button, thenpressing the R (RESET) button setsthe clock back to the previous hour.If the displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets forward to thebeginning of the next hour.

When you are finished, press theCLOCK button again.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

Press and hold the CLOCK buttonuntil the clock flashes. Change thehours by pressing the H button untilthe numbers advance to the desiredtime. Change the minutes bypressing the M button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.

Refer to the Navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

On models with Navigation System

On models without Navigation System

Setting the Clock

LX model EX model

Features

227

CLOCK BUTTON

H BUTTON R BUTTON

M BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTON

H BUTTON R BUTTONM BUTTON


▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM Radio (U.S. models), CD (if adisc is loaded) or a tape (if theoptional tape player is installed and atape is loaded).

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the steering wheel.

If you are playing a tape, press thetop ( ) of the CH button to advanceto the next selection. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious selection. The systemsenses a silent period, then goesback to play mode.


Steering Wheel Controls

228

MODE BUTTONVOL BUTTON

CH BUTTON


Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code withthe preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from the fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in thisOwner’s Manual.

If you should happen to lose the card,you must obtain the code numberfrom a Honda dealer. To do this, youwill need the system’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, or the radiofuse is removed, the audio systemwill disable itself. If this happens,you will see ‘‘ ’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is located on the radio codecard included in your Owner’sManual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost when thepower was disconnected.


Radio Theft ProtectionF

eatures

229


Rear Entertainment System

DVD Player

Models with Navigation System

Models without Navigation System

Overhead Screen Unit

230

REAR PWR BUTTON REAR CONTROL KNOB

REAR PWR BUTTON REAR CONTROL KNOB


Press the REAR PWR button. Toturn on the rear controls (ceilingpanel/remote control), press the RRCTRL knob. The system’s iconshows in the upper display. Yourpassengers can then operate the rearsystem with the control panel in theceiling. The rear control panel can beused as a remote control when it isdetached from the ceiling unit. Pressthe RR CTRL knob again to turn therear controls off. You will see theRear Controls Off icon in the upperdisplay.

The rear system selects the source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in thedisplay. You must select anothersource.

When you turn on the system, therear speakers are automaticallyturned off if the rear system selectsa different entertainment sourcethan the front system. You will seethe Rear Speakers Off icon in theupper display. The sound for the rearsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones.

Your vehicle is equipped with a rearentertainment system that includes aDVD player for the enjoyment of therear passengers.

With this system, the rearpassengers can enjoy a differententertainment source (radio, CDchanger, DVD player, or optionaltape player) than the front seatoccupants. The audio is broadcastthrough the supplied wirelessheadphones.

If you want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until the Rear SpeakersOff icon goes off.

The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) positionto operate the rear entertainmentsystem.

Available on EX with Leather andTouring models

To Turn On the System Rear Speakers

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

231

NOTE:


To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, turn theRR CTRL knob clockwise. Theamber RR LED comes on to showthat the control panel is enabled.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,select CD. If a CD is loaded in thelower player, select DVD/AUX.

To play the radio, the buttons for thefront entertainment system have thesame functions.

The DVD player in your rearentertainment system can play DVDvideo discs and CDs.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

To Select Rear Entertainmentfrom the Front Control Panel

Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel


232

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPEN BUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN


－

－

Turn the Rear CTRL knob clockwise.The amber Rear LED comes on toshow that the control panel is nowenabled.

Insert a DVD into the DVD/CDplayer below the front panel.

Push the DVD in halfway, the drivewill pull it in the rest of the way.

Press the PLAY button ifthe DVD does not start playingautomatically.

Press the PAUSE buttonto pause the DVD. Press the buttonagain or press PLAY to resume.Pause works only with the DVDplayer.

CONTINUED

PLAY

PAUSE


eatures

Models with Navigation System

Models without Navigation System

233

EJECTBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BARREAR CTRL KNOB

PLAY BUTTON PAUSE BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

REAR CTRL KNOB

PLAY BUTTON PAUSEBUTTON


－＋

－

＋

－

－Press and hold theside to move forward; you will see

‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press and holdthe side to move backward; youwill see ‘‘REV’’ in the display.Release the bar when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the

system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track orchapter. Press and release theside of the bar to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track orchapter. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track orchapter.

Press the eject button toremove the DVD from the drive.

To return front panel control to thefront audio system, turn the REARCTRL knob counterclockwise.

To turn on the rear entertainmentsystem from the rear control panel,press the PWR button. Use the AM/FM button, XM RADIO button (U.S.models), CD button, DVD/AUXbutton (U.S. models), or AUX button(Canadian models) to select theentertainment source. The selectedsource will be shown in the display.Make sure the rear control operationhas not been disabled with the REARCTRL knob on the front panel.

SEEK/SKIP EJECT

To Return to Front AudioControls

Using the Rear Control Panel


234


▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼

Use the and buttons to select astation from the radio preset buttons.Press the button to tune the radioto a higher frequency, or press thebutton to tune to a lower frequency.Pressing the or buttoncauses the system to search up ordown the band for a station with astrong signal. You will see SEEK inthe display.

Use the and buttons to select astation from the radio preset buttons.Press the button to search upthe channels in the channel mode.The system will search up thechannels within the category whenthe radio is in the category mode.Press the button to searchdown the channels in the channelmode. The system will search downthe channels within the category

when the radio is in the categorymode.

CONTINUED

To Play the Radio from the RearControl Panel

To Play the XM Radio from theRear Control Panel


eatures

235


▲ ▼

Press the or button toselect another category.

Pressing and holding the DISPbutton for more than 5 seconds willchange the search mode betweenChannel Search and CategorySearch. Each time you press andrelease the DISP button, the displayabove the rear control panel changesin the following sequence: ChannelNumber, Category Name, MusicName, Artist Name, Channel Name,and back to Channel Number.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,select them by pressing the CDbutton. If a CD is loaded in the DVDplayer, press the DVD/AUX button.

To rewind the tape, push thebutton. You will see REW in

the display. To fast forward the tape,push the button. You will seeFF displayed.

Press the button to find thebeginning of the current song orpassage. Press the button tofind the beginning of the next songor passage.

Press the button to change thetape direction.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or button.The system will continue to movethrough the track. Press the

button to move forward, or thebutton to move backward.

Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changerand the overhead screen is not open,pressing the or button changesthe discs.

To Play a CD from the RearControl Panel

To Play the Optional Tape Playerfrom the Rear Control Panel


236


The video screen is for use by rearseat passengers only. The driver andfront seat passenger should not tryto view the screen while driving.

Press the button when youwant to pause the DVD. Press thisbutton again to go back to PLAY.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next chapter. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current chapter.

To move rapidly within a chapter,press and hold the or

button. The system willcontinue to move through the

chapter. Press the button tomove forward, or the button tomove backward. Release the buttonwhen the system reaches the pointyou want.To select the menu on the DVD,press the MENU/SCROLL button(U.S. models) or MENU button(Canadian models). Use the ,

, , and buttons tomove to the desired menu selection,then press the ENT button to enteryour selection.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

To Play a DVD from the RearControl Panel


eatures

237

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPENBUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN


When you press the DISP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the title,chapter, elapsed time, and personalsurround logo are displayed(STATUS 1).

When you press the DISP buttonagain, the subtitle, audio, angle,sound characteristics, and personalsurround logo are displayed(STATUS 2).

To go back to play, press the DISPbutton.

DISP Button


238


When you press the MENU buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the DVD’smain menu is displayed. To go backto play, press the RETURN button.

When you press the SETUP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the DVD’ssetup menu is displayed at thebottom of the screen. You can thenchange various settings of play mode,personal surround, and display. Togo back to play without changing anysetting, press the RETURN orSETUP button, or select ‘‘Close’’ bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

When you select ‘‘Play Mode’’ bypressing the or button, theplay mode setup menu is displayedabove the ‘‘Play Mode’’ icon.

CONTINUED

MENU Button System Messages Play Mode


eatures

239


▼ ▲▼ ▲

▼ ▲

Top Menu Audio

When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’using the or button, the DVD’stitle menu is displayed. This menu isalso displayed when you press theMENU button while a DVD is notplaying.

When you select ‘‘Audio’’ from theplay mode setup menu by pressingthe or button, you will see asubmenu of the dubbed language.

The selectable languages vary fromDVD to DVD, and this feature maynot be available on some DVDs.

Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu.

Select the desired language bypressing the or button. Thesound characteristics (Dolby Digital,LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recordedwith the selected language are alsodisplayed next to the language.

To go back to play, press the returnbutton.


240


▼ ▲

▼▲ ▼ ▲

▼ ▲

Subtitle Angle

To turn the subtitle on and off, select‘‘Subtitle’’ from the setup menu bypressing the or button. You willsee submenu ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’ Select‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON’’ by pressing the or

button.

If more than one subtitle language isavailable, you will see the languagecurrently selected when you select‘‘ON’’ in the previous step.Select the desired subtitle languageby pressing the or button.Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu.

On some DVDs, the scenes arerecorded by more than one camera,giving different viewpoints of thesame scene. To change the angle,select ‘‘Angle’’ from the setup menu.You will see a submenu if there aredifferent angles available.Select the number on the submenuby pressing the or button.Press the RETURN or ENT buttonto go back to the play mode setupmenu. CONTINUED


eatures

241


▼ ▲

▼ ▲

▼ ▲

▼▲

Search

When you select the ‘‘Search’’ fromthe play mode setup menu, you willsee the submenu shown above. Inthe left submenu, you can selectbetween ‘‘Title’’ and ‘‘Chapter.’’ Theright submenu displays the currenttitle or chapter number and the totalnumber of titles or chapters.

To do a title search, select ‘‘Title’’ bypressing the or button. Changethe number on the right submenu bypressing the or button, andpress the ENT button to begin thetitle search. If you press theRETURN button, the display returnsto the play mode setup menu withoutdoing the search.

To do a chapter search, select‘‘Chapter’’ by pressing the orbutton. Change the number on theright submenu by pressing the or

button, and press the ENT buttonto begin the chapter search. If youpress the RETURN button, thedisplay returns to the play modesetup menu without doing the search.


242


Num Input

A numerical command can be issuedto a DVD by inputting a two digitnumber, and a button number can beselected on the screen.

Select and enter the second digitnumber the same way. The cursorwill automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’icon when you press the ENT button.Press the ENT button to enter thenumber command. To go back to theDVD screen, press the RETURNbutton.

Select the first digit number usingthe , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. If you want tochange the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’and press the ENT button, thenselect and enter the new number.

Select the ‘‘Num Input’’ from the playmode setup menu. The screen willchange as shown above. If you selectthe ‘‘Move Key’’ using the ,

, , or button, andpress the ENT button, the NumInput display on the screen will

change from the left side to rightside or right to left.

CONTINUED


eatures

243


▼ ▲

When you select ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ by pressing the

or button, the personalsurround setup menu is displayedabove the ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ icon.

Selecting one of the sound effects,Cinema, Music, or Voice, from thepersonal surround menu allows youto change the sound in yourheadphones to match the disc you

are playing.

Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’by pressing the or button, andenter your selection by pressing theENT button. The ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ logo is displayed inthe upper right corner of the screen.

If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logodisappears, and there will be nospecial sound effect.

You can adjust these displaysettings:

Back LightContrastBrightnessTintColor

To adjust the display, select‘‘Display’’ by pressing the or

button, and enter yourselection by pressing the ENTbutton. The display changes asshown above.

Personal Surround Display


244


▼ ▲▼ ▲

Select the quality you want to adjustby pressing the or button, andthen pressing the ENT button. Theadjustment bar is displayed next tothe selected item. Adjust the settingby pressing the or button.When you are finished with youradjustment, press the ENT button.

If you want to set the display to thedefault setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ bypressing the or button, and,then pressing the ENT button.

The display changes as shown above.

Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENTbutton. You will see the message‘‘Default display settings applied’’ onthe display for 5 seconds.


eatures

245


Screen ModeYou can set the screen mode tothese settings:

NormalWideZoomFull


246

Normal Wide

Zoom Full


▼ ▲

Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressingthe or button, then pressthe ENT button.

The selectable setting menu isdisplayed, and the current setting ishighlighted in blue.

Select the desired setting bypressing the or button, thenpress the ENT button.

The selected setting will behighlighted in blue for one second,and the screen returns to the playmode in the selected setting.

CONTINUED


eatures

247


▼ ▲

When you press the SETUP buttonon the rear control panel when aDVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIALSETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.

When you select ‘‘Language’’ withthe or button, the menushown above appears.

To retune to the stop or prestopscreen, select ‘‘Close’’ using the

or button, and then pressthe ENT, or the SETUP button.

To select the language used in theDISC menus, select ‘‘Menu Lang’’ bypressing the or button. You willsee the submenu next to ‘‘MenuLang.’’

There are two selectable menus:‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’

Menu LanguageINITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)


248


▼ ▲Select the desired language bypressing the or button, andthen pressing the ENT button.

The selectable languages are,English, French, Spanish, German,Italian, Dutch, and Japanese.

If you want another language thanthose listed, you need to enter thecode number of the desired language.Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENTbutton. The display changes asshown in the next column.

If you select the ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’menu.

CONTINUED


eatures

249


▼ ▲

Audio Language

If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the displaychanges to the language code inputmode. Select the first number digitusing the , , , or

button, and press the ENTbutton to enter it. Repeat this until allfour digits are filled. When thefourth digit is entered, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel to enter the newlanguage code.

If you made a mistake entering anumber digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on thedisplay with the , , ,or button, and press the ENTbutton on the control panel. Thenselect and enter the correct numberdigit as described. The displayreturns to the initial ‘‘Language’’menu screen.

You can select the dubbed languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Audio Lang’’ by pressing the

or button. You will see thesubmenu next to ‘‘Audio Lang.’’

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.


250


▼ ▲

Subtitle Language

You can select the subtitle languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Subtitle Lang’’ by pressingthe or button. You will see thesubmenu next to the ‘‘Subtitle Lang.’’

When you select ‘‘Others’’ at thebottom of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’screen, the above menu appears onthe screen.

Dynamic Range

‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces thedifferences between the loud andquiet sound levels throughout thedisc. When this is on, the loudersounds are lowered, and quietersounds are increased.

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.

CONTINUED

INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)


eatures

251


▼ ▲ ▼ ▲When you select the ‘‘DynamicRange’’ by pressing the orbutton, you will see the submenunext to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ asshown above.

To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressingthe or button, and thenpress the ENT button.

Angle Mark

When you switch to another anglewhile playing a DVD, the angle markis displayed in the upper right cornerof the screen.

You can set the system to display ornot display this angle mark.

Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing theor button. The above submenu

appears. If you want the angle markto be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the

or button, and then pressthe ENT button. The display returnsto the ‘‘Others’’ menu.


252

ANGLE MARK


▼ ▲

Parental Control Level

You can place an auditory restrictionby changing the parental controllevel. The higher the level number,the lower the restriction.

Select ‘‘Parental Level’’ by pressingthe or button. You will see thesubmenu shown above. If you select‘‘No,’’ and press the ENT button, thedisplay returns to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.

When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’the display changes as shown above.To change the level, you need toenter your four digit password.Select the number for the first digitby pressing the , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. Repeat this until allfour digits are filled. When you enterthe fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel. CONTINUED


eatures

253


▼ ▲

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat theparental control level steps until youenter the correct password.

If you enter the password correctly,you can then change the parentalcontrol level.

Once you correctly enter thepassword, press the or buttonto change the level, and then pressthe ENT button to enter yourselection.

Changing the Password

The password was set to ‘‘1111’’when the vehicle left the factory.


254


To change the password, select‘‘Password.’’ You will see the abovemenu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe ‘‘Others’’ menu.

Select the first digit by pressing the, , , or button,

and enter it by pressing the ENTbutton. Repeat this until all fourdigits are entered. When you enterthe fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel.

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat thepassword setting steps until youenter the correct password.

CONTINUED


eatures

255


▲If you forget the password, select‘‘Password,’’ and press the button10 times.

The display changes as shown above.If you want to use the defaultpassword (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ andpress the ENT button.

The message ‘‘Default passwordsetting applied’’ is displayed for5 seconds.


256


If it takes several pushes on thebutton to operate the rearentertainment system, have yourdealer replace the batteries as soonas possible.

The rear control panel can bedetached from the ceiling unit andused as a remote control. To removeit from the ceiling unit, press therelease button. The control panel willswing down partway. Pivot it downfurther past the detent until itdetaches from the hinge. To reinstallit, reverse the procedure.

Battery type: BR3032

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.


This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remote Control Replacing the Remote ControlBatteries


eatures

257

COVER

RELEASE BUTTON


There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.

Those packages or jackets shouldalso bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be playedin this system.

The tips on how to handle andprotect DVDs are basically the sameas those for compact discs. Refer to‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page .

The DVD player in your rearentertainment system can playDVDs and CDs bearing the abovemarks on their packages or jackets.

221

Playable DVDs

Protecting DVDs


258


If you see an error message in thescreen while operating the DVDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear themessage, take your vehicle to adealer.

SolutionMessage

Eject the disc and reinsert it.

Use a disc with the regional designation of ‘‘1’’ or ‘‘All’’.The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disccompatible with this system.Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental control level (seepages 253 and 254 ).

ERROR F0ERROR F2Invalid region codeInvalid disc

Parental control active.Change level to view.

DVD Player Error Messages


eatures

259


Each headphone uses one AAAbattery. The battery is under thecover on the left earpiece. Toremove the cover, insert a coin in theslot and twist it slightly to pry thecover away from the earpiece. Pullthe cover outward, and pivot it out ofthe way.

Some state and local governmentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. When using the headphones,make sure you wear them correctly:L (left) and R (right) are marked onthe sides of the frame. The antennasare in the front of the earpieces. Ifyou wear the headphones backwards,the antennas will be aimed awayfrom the system, affecting the soundquality and range.

To use the headphones, pivot theearpieces outward. This turns themon. To adjust the volume, turn thedial on the bottom of the rightearpiece. When you remove theheadphones, the earpiecesautomatically pivot inward, and theheadphones turn off. When not inuse, store the headphones in thepocket of either front seat.


Replacing BatteriesWireless Headphones

260

VOLUMEDIAL TAB


Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are under thethird seat armrest on the driver’sside. To access these connectors,open the cover by pulling up on thelever.

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.Some video game power suppliesmay cause poor picture quality.

V = Video jackL = Left audio jackR = Right audio jack

Remove the battery. Install the newbattery in the earpice as shown inthe diagram next to the battery slot.Slide the cover back into place on theearpiece, then press down on theback edge to lock it in place.

CONTINUED


Auxiliary Input Jacks

Features

261

COVER

BATTERY

ARMREST LEVER

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS


There are three headphoneconnectors for the third seatpassengers. Each connector has itsown volume control.


262

VOLUME DIALS

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS


The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors and the tailgate from theoutside with the key, the lock tab,the door lock switch, or the remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator in the instrument panelstarts blinking immediately to showyou the system is setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door, the tailgate, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter, will cause it toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, tailgate, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Tailgate OpenMonitor on the instrument panel(see page ), to see if the doorsand the tailgate are fully closed.Since it is not part of the monitordisplay, manually check the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe alarm stops. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock eitherfront door with the key or theremote transmitter.

67


Security SystemF

eatures

263

SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR


Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel comes onto show the system is nowactivated.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel cruise control. To resumethe set speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel comes on.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

1.

2.

3.

Cruise Control

Using Cruise Control

264

DECEL/SETBUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

Improper use of cruise controlcan lead to a crash.

Use cruise control only whentraveling on open highways ingood weather.


CONTINUED

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel goes out. Whenthe vehicle slows to the desiredspeed, press the DECEL/SETbutton.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

You can increase the set speed inany of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired speed, release the button.

Push the accelerator pedal,accelerate to the desired speed,and press the DECEL/SET button.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set speed inany of these ways:

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set speed.

Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed

Features

265


Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap the brake pedal, the systemremembers the previously set speed.To return to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), and thenpress and release the RES/ACCELbutton. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator comes on. The vehicleaccelerates to the same speed asbefore.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous set speed.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Cruise Control

Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control

266

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON


－The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinkTransceiver for about 20 seconds, oruntil the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then go to step1.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured beforeApril 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.They do not have the safety feature

that causes the motor to stop andreverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

CONTINUED


HomeLink Universal Transceiver

General Information

Training HomeLink


Before you begin

Features

267


Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

Press and hold the remote controlbutton and one of the HomeLinkbuttons at the same time.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it. If the buttondoes not work, repeat theprocedure to train it again. If it stilldoes not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. See if you do bypressing and holding theHomeLink button you just trained.If the red indicator blinks for 2seconds then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.Go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotelycontrolled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

When the red indicator flashesrapidly, release both buttons.HomeLink should have learnedthe code from the remote control.

The red indicator in HomeLinkshould begin flashing. It will flashslowly at first, then rapidly.2.

3.

1.4.

5.

7.

6.

269


268

The remote control you are trainingf rom may stop transmitting af ter 2seconds. This is not enough f orHomeLink to learn the code. Releaseand press the button on the remotecontrol every 2 seconds until HomeLinkhas learned the code.


For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

269

TRAINING BUTTON


You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

To train an already programmedHomeLink button with a new device,you do not have to erase all thememory. Train the selected buttonover the existing memory codefollowing the steps under ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’.





Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button

Customer Assistance

270


Your vehicle has a parking sensorsystem. The system lets you knowthe approximate distance betweenyour vehicle and most obstacleswhile you are parking. When thesystem is on and your vehicle isnearing an obstacle, you will hearbeeping and see parking messages inthe multi-information display.

To activate the system, push thebutton on the dashboard with theignition in the ON (II) position. Theindicator in the button comes onwhen the system is on. To turn thesystem off, push the button again.

The system has two front cornersensors, two rear corner sensors,and a rear center sensor.The rear center sensor works onlywhen the shift lever is in Reverse (R),and the vehicle speed is less than 5mph (8 km/h).

The corner sensors work only whenthe shift lever is in any position otherthan P and the vehicle speed is lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h).

All obstacles may not always besensed. Even when the system is on,you should look for obstacles nearyour vehicle to make sure it is safe topark.

On Touring model

Parking Sensor SystemF

eatures

271

PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM BUTTONMULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY


Example shown: Obstacle is at the left front of the vehicle

When the system senses an obstacle,the appropriate indicator comes on,and a beeper sounds as shown in thefollowing tables.

When you turn the system on, allindicators come on in the multi-information display, and a beepersounds once.

Distance

Beeper

About 16-20 in(40-50 cm)

About 12-16 in(30-40 cm)

Upper leftindicator stays on

Short beeps Continuousbeep

IndicatorsandMessages

Very short beeps

About 12 in(30 cm) or less



Parking Sensor System

Corner Sensor OperationMulti-Information DisplayMessages and Beeper Operation

272


If the system develops a problem,you will see a ‘‘CHECK PARKINGSENSOR SYSTEM’’ message in themulti-information display, and abeeper sounds continuously. Veryoften, a sensor covered with mud, ice,snow, etc. is the cause of thismessage. Check the sensors first. Ifthe message stays on or the beeperdoes not stop, have the systemchecked by your dealer.

Distance

Beeper Short beeps Continuousbeeps

IndicatorsandMessages

Very short beeps

Bottomindicator stays on

About 40-70 in(1-1.8 m)

About 24-40 in(0.6-1 m)

About 24 in(0.6 m) or less



CONTINUED


Rear Center Sensor Operation

Features

273


The range of the corner sensors andthe rear center sensor are limited.Each corner sensor is capable ofsensing an obstacle only when yourvehicle is 20 in (50 cm) or closer.The rear center sensor senses anobstacle that is behind your vehicle70 in (1.8 m) or closer.

Do not put any accessories on oraround the sensors.

The system may not functionproperly under these conditions:

After the vehicle has been sittingout in hot or cold weather.When the system is affected bysome electrical equipment ordevices generating an ultrasonicwave.When operating the vehicle in badweather.

The system may not sense thin orlow objects, or sonic-absorptivematerials such as snow, cotton, orsponge.

The system cannot sense objectsdirectly under the bumper.

The sensors are covered withsnow, ice, mud, etc.When the vehicle is on a roughroad, on grass, or on a hill.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Canadian Owners:


274

Within about 20 in (50 cm) Within about 70 in (1.8 m)


▼ ▲

When in reverse, the touch screenand Navi ‘‘hard’’ buttons are lockedout, except the ‘‘ZOOM’’ button.Touching the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ buttonallows you to adjust the brightness ofthe rear view camera image.

Whenever you shift to R (Reverse)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownon the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep therear view camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens.

Since the rear view camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

On EX with Leather and Touringmodels

Rear View Camera and MonitorF

eatures

275

The camera brightness cannot beadjusted by voice control.


276


Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

..............................Break-in period . 278...............................Gasoline Type . 278

.........Service Station Procedures . 279....................................Refueling . 279

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 280

...................................Oil Check . 281.............Engine Coolant Check . 282

...............................Fuel Economy . 283........Improving Fuel Economy . 283

...Accessories and Modifications . 284.............................Carrying Cargo . 286

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

277


Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not tow a trailer.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

We recommend quality gasolinescontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contact

your dealer for service.

Break-in Period, Gasoline Type

Break-in Period Gasoline Type

Quick Start Guide

278


Before refueling, make sure the rearsliding door on the driver’s side isclosed.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

eventhough the tank is not full, there maybe a problem with your vehicle’s fuelvapor recovery system. The systemhelps keep fuel vapors from goinginto the atmosphere. Consult yourdealer.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle under the lower leftcorner of the dashboard.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Insert theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Refueling

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

279

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.


Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood. The hood latchhandle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pullup on this handle until it releasesthe hood. Lift the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least three times.If you do not properly tighten thecap, the malfunction indicatorlamp may come on (see page ).On the Touring model, you willalso see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message on the multi-informationdisplay.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

1.

5.

6.

2.

372

Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Hood

280

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH


Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its hole.

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole onthe passenger’s side of the hood.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

1.

3.

2.

3.

4.

328

Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

281

DIPSTICK

SUPPORT ROD

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK


Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

323

331Adding

Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant Check Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Service Station Procedures

282

MAX RESERVE TANK

MIN


Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenancemessages. See

(page ).

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.323

For example,

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Before

Driving

283


Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability (see page ).

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer. If possible,have your dealer inspect the finalinstallation.

285

376

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

284

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.


Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety systems could make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Seeon page .

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

35

Modifying Your Vehicle

Additional Safety Precautions

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

285


＊＊＊

＊＊

＊＊＊

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

In-floor storage (with LazySusan )

Glove box (upper and lower)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Roof-rack (if installed)Rear compartmentCenter pocketRemovable second row console

Rear cargo area, including thesecond row seats when removed,and the third row seat when foldedflat

Front door and seat-back pockets

: Touring model only: EX and Touring models only

Carrying Cargo

286

REAR COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKET

CARGO AREA

LOWERGLOVE BOX

UPPER GLOVEBOX

REMOVABLESECOND ROWCONSOLE

CENTERPOCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

IN-FLOOR STORAGE(with Lazy Susan )


×

－

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

The maximum load for your vehicleis:

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromthe maximum load.

For example, If your vehicle is theTouring model, and if there will befive 150 lbs (70 kg) occupants inyour vehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is458 lbs (198 kg).5 150 lbs (70 kg) = 750 lbs(350 kg)1,208 lbs (548 kg) 750 lbs (350 kg)= 458 lbs (198 kg)

Determine the combined weightof accessories, luggage, and cargobeing loaded in the vehicle. Theweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4[458 lbs (198 kg) in this example].

This figure includes, cargo,accessories, and the tongue weight ifyou are towing a trailer.

To determine the correct cargo andluggage load limit:

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 1,208lbs (548 kg)’’ on your vehicle’splacard (on the driver’s doorjamb)if your vehicle is the Touringmodel, for example.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

LX model: 1,349 lbs (612 kg)EX model: 1,388 lbs (630 kg)EX with Leather: 1,322 lbs (600 kg)Touring model: 1,208 lbs (548 kg)

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

287

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.


Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals or seat operation.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

Keep the glove boxes closed whiledriving. If either are open, apassenger could be injured duringa crash or sudden stop.

If you place items near the rearwindows, be sure they are belowthe bottom of the windows. Ifcargo is higher, it could interferewith proper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 150 lb (68 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

56

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

288


You can use the cargo net to secureitems in the cargo area, and storesmall items between the two halvesof the net. To install the cargo net,hook the loops on the four corners ofthe net to the tabs at both sides ofthe tailgate sill.

There are cargo hooks for plasticgrocery bags on the back of the thirdrow seat. They are designed to holdlight items. Heavy objects maydamage the hooks.


Carrying Cargo

Cargo Net Cargo Hooks

Before

Driving

289

CARGO HOOKS


290


This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the vehicle stability assistsystem, the tire pressure monitoringsystem, and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 292.......................Starting the Engine . 293

..............Automatic Transmission . 294..................................Parking Tips . 298

.............................Braking System . 299...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 300

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 301

Tire Pressure Monitoring System......................................(TPMS) . 303

...........................Towing a Trailer . 306

DrivingD

riving

291


You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors and thetailgate are securely closed andlocked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

16

61

167

149

127

Preparing to Drive

292


Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in START for more than15 seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start right away, pausefor at least 10 seconds beforetrying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

5.

6.1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the EngineD

riving

293

Immobilizer System

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. See

on page .129


These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal and pressthe release button on the side of theshift lever. You cannot shift out ofPark when the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

294

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

D3 BUTTON


－

－

－

－

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

Press the brakepedal and press the release button toshift from Park to Reverse. To shiftfrom Reverse to Neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from Neutral toanother gear.

Use this position fornormal driving. The transmissionautomatically selects a suitable gearfor your speed and acceleration. Youmay notice the transmission shiftingup at higher speeds when the engineis cold. This helps the engine warmup faster.

297

CONTINUED

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 22 to DD to NN to DR to ND to DD to D

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

Press the D button.

3

3

3

3

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

295


－

－

－If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

To use D , press theD button when the shift lever is inthe ‘‘D’’ position. This position is simi-lar to D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use Second gear:For more power when climbing.To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.When driving downhill with atrailer.

This position locks thetransmission in First gear. By upshift-ing and downshifting through 1, 2,and D, you can operate thistransmission much like a manualtransmission without a clutch pedal.

33

3

3


Engine Speed LimiterDrive (D )

Second (2)

First (1)3

296


Do this if pushing on the brake pedaland pressing the release button doesnot shift the transmission out ofpark:

Set the parking brake.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover. Using asmall flat-tipped screwdriver or a

metal fingernail file, carefully pryon the edge of the cover to removeit.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then install thecover. Press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Push down on the key while youpull the shift lever towards youand move it out of Park to Neutral.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

5.

6.

4.

3.

1.

2.


Shift Lock Release

Driving

297


Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Lock the doors and the tailgate.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area, or take themwith you.

Turn off the lights.

Parking Tips

Parking

298


Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Braking System

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

Driving

299


＊

You should never pump the brake pedal.Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave your dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible. on loose or

uneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change.

it only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle;

Important Safety Reminders

300

ABS INDICATOR


CONTINUED

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned toON (II), there may be a problemwith the VSA system. Have yourdealer inspect your vehicle as soonas possible.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output,and by selectively applying thebrakes.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink.

If the low tire pressure indicatorcomes on (see page ), or themulti-information display shows a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message(see page ), the VSA systemautomatically turns on even if youturn it off with the VSA OFF button.

66

84


Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Driving

301


This button is under the driver’s sidevent. Press it to turn the VSA systemon or off.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (all models except U.S.Touring).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

Without VSA, your vehicle still hasnormal braking and cornering ability,but it does not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

349

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA and Tire SizesVSA OFF Button

302

VSA OFFSWITCH

VSA OFF SWITCH

LX and EX models

Touring model


Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

You will see the above display on themulti-information display when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II)and press the INFO button on thesteering wheel six times.

To see the inflation pressures of allfour tires, press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel. Thedisplay changes as shown above.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator in the instrumentpanel to come on. If this happens,you will see which tire is losing thepressure in the multi-informationdisplay along with a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message.

CONTINUED


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)D

riving

303


If a flat tire is causing the low tirepressure indicator to come on, youwill see the above message in themulti-information display.

It is possible that the pressuresshown in the multi-informationdisplay and the pressures youmanually measure are slightlydifferent.If the difference is significant andyou cannot make the low tirepressure indicator and message inthe multi-information display go outafter inflating the tires to thespecified values, have your dealercheck the system as soon as possible.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability. Each tire, includingthe spare should be checkedmonthly when cold, and set to therecommended inflation pressure asspecified in the vehicle placard andowner’s manual (see page ).346

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

304


The tires on your vehicles are PAXtires, and you cannot replace orrepair a flat tire. Replacement orrepair of tires must be performed bya Honda dealer or an authorizedMichelin PAX system dealer.

If the low tire pressure indicatorcomes on, or the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message, the VSA systemautomatically turns on even whenthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF button (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF button again.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see the above message inthe multi-information display.

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

For more information on theMichelin PAX system, refer to page

.

Because your vehicle is equippedwith the Michelin PAX system, youcan continue to drive up to about 125miles (200 km). If you have a flat tire,take your vehicle to the nearestHonda dealer or authorized MichelinPAX system dealer.

301

356

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Changing a Tire with TPMS

TPMS System Failure

Driving

305


Your vehicle has been designed toprimarily carry passengers and theircargo. You can also use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itdepends on several factors. Seepage for the driving limits foryour towing situation. Towing aload that is too heavy can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling andperformance. It can also damagethe engine and drivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetotal trailer weight. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it tosway.

307

Towing a Trailer

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

306

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.


＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊＊＊

Maximum Total Trailer Weight

Including driver. Based on 150 lbs (70 kg) per occupant.

Number ofOccupants

12345678

See page for information about fluid coolers.

Equipped with transmission coolerand power steering fluid cooler

3,500 lbs (1,580 kg)3,350 lbs (1,520 kg)3,200 lbs (1,450 kg)3,050 lbs (1,380 kg)2,900 lbs (1,310 kg)2,750 lbs (1,250 kg)

2,600 lbs (1,180 kg) 1,550 lbs (700 kg)650 lbs (290 kg)

1:2:3:4:

LX and EX modelsTouring model

309

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,and the tongue load is 5,952 lbs(2,700 kg).

The maximum allowable weight ofthe fully loaded vehicle and traileris 8,410 lbs (3,815 kg) (see page

).

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,and the tongue load must notexceed 2,833 lbs (1,285 kg) on thefront axle, and 3,197 lbs (1,450 kg)on the rear axle.

386

1

3

2

3 4

Towing a Trailer

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Driving

307


The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

If the total trailer weight is morethan 1,850 lbs (840 kg), you mustalso use a weight distributing hitch.This device transfers weight fromthe vehicle’s rear wheels to the frontwheels, and to the trailer’s wheels.Carefully follow the hitch maker’sinstructions for proper installationand adjustment.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment,depending on the size of your trailer,how much load you are towing, andwhere you tow. To ensure the bestquality, we recommend that youpurchase Honda equipmentwhenever possible.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and meets federal, state,province, and local regulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody,using the six threaded holesprovided. A hitch and the requiredfluid coolers designed especially foryour Odyssey can be obtained fromyour Honda dealer.

Towing a Trailer

Checking Loads Towing Equipment andAccessories

Weight Distributing Hitch

Safety Chains

Hitches

308


CONTINUED

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electrically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check therequirements for the areas whereyou plan to tow, and use onlyequipment designed for your vehicle.

If the total trailer weight exceeds2,000 lbs (900 kg), you should installa sway control device to minimizeswaying that can occur in crosswindsand in normal and emergencydriving maneuvers. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

To help prevent overheating, atransmission fluid cooler and apower steering fluid cooler arerequired for trailer towing. Thesecoolers are available only from yourHonda dealer.

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

See your trailer dealer for moreinformation on installing electricbrakes.

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Brakes Trailer LightsSway Control

Transmission Fluid Cooler andPower Steering Fluid Cooler D

riving

309


＋＋

To use the trailer lighting connector,you will need a wiring harness andconverter. This comes with theHonda hitch (see page ), or itmay be obtained separately fromyour dealer.

If you use a non-Honda trailerlighting harness and converter, youcan get the connector and pins thatmate with the connector in yourvehicle from your dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. If you use the compactspare tire that came with yourvehicle, it could adversely affectvehicle handling. See page forproper tire size, page for how tostore a full size wheel and tire, and

page for information onchanging a flat tire.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Many states and provinces requirespecial outside mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

Because of the Michelin PAX system,you must not change a flat tire byyourself, or use a compact spare tireon your vehicle.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector behind the right sidepanel in the cargo area. Refer to thedrawing above for the purpose ofeach pin.

308349

364

360

U.S. Touring model

Spare TiresAdditional Towing Equipment

Towing a Trailer

310

GROUND LEFT TURN SIGNAL

SMALL LIGHTS

B HAZARD B HAC

RIGHT TURNSIGNAL

SMALL LIGHTS


When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Use the D position when towing atrailer on level roads. Do not exceed55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds,the trailer may sway or affect vehiclehandling.

Towing a Trailer

Pre-Tow Checklist Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving

311


Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speed,and steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

3

bottom

Towing a Trailer

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Backing Up

Parking

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

312


This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 314....................Maintenance Minder . 315....................Maintenance Record . 325

..............................Fluid Locations . 327........................Adding Engine Oil . 328

.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 329..............................Engine Coolant . 331

....................Windshield Washers . 333....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 334

....................................Brake Fluid . 335....................Power Steering Fluid . 336

....................................Timing Belt . 336.............................................Lights . 337

................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 343.....................................Floor Mats . 343

.................................Wiper Blades . 344...............................................Tires . 346

...................Checking the Battery . 352.............................Vehicle Storage . 353

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages in theodometer/trip meter display ormulti-Information display, amaintenance record, and instructionsfor simple maintenance tasks youmay want to take care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

401

MaintenanceM

aintenance

313


To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance Safety


Injury from moving parts.

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

314

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection,maintenance recommendations,and schedules in this owner’smanual.


Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items in theodometer/trip meter display on theLX and EX models, or in the multi-information display on the Touringmodel, to show you when you shouldhave your dealer perform engine oilreplacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage. To see the current engine oil life,

turn the ignition switch to ON (II),and push and release the SELECT/RESET knob on the instrumentpanel 3 times.

If the oil life is 15 percent or less,you will see the oil life indicator forseveral seconds every time you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II). Themaintenance minder indicator willalso come on, and the maintenanceitem code(s) for other scheduledmaintenance items needing servicewill be displayed next to the engineoil life indicator.

CONTINUED

On LX and EX models

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Indicator

Maintenance

315

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR


When the remaining engine oil life isless than 5 percent, you will see a‘‘CHANGE OIL’’ message in theodometer/trip meter display, alongwith the same maintenance itemcode(s), every time you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, you will see the abovedisplay. In this display, the remainingoil life indicator will be blinking. Thisdisplay comes on and stays on everytime you turn the ignition switch toON (II). When you see this message,have the indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

You can change the display to theodometer, the trip meter, or theoutside temperature by pushing theSELECT/RESET knob on theinstrument panel.

Maintenance Minder

316


－

CONTINUED

When the remaining engine oil life is15 percent or less, the display showsa ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ messagealong with the maintenance itemcode(s) for other scheduledmaintenance items needing service.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to ON (II),then push and release theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel three times.

If you still do not perform theindicated maintenance, you will see anegative mileage, for example‘‘ 543,’’ blinking in the display. Thisnegative mileage means that youshould have performed the indicatedmaintenance 543 miles ago.Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the master warningindicator will also come on.

On Touring model

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

317

MASTER WARNING INDICATOR


These messages will come on everytime you turn the ignition switch toON (II).

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on page .

You can change the display to theodometer, the trip meter, or theoutside temperature by pushing theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel.

When the remaining engine oil life isless than 0 percent and you have notdone the required maintenance, youwill see the above display for severalseconds. In this display, ‘‘0’’ will beblinking.

The display then changes to‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE.’’

When the remaining engine oil life isless than 5 percent, you will see theabove display. The display thenchanges to ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW.’’Have the indicated maintenancedone as soon as possible.

320

Maintenance Minder

318


－All the maintenance items displayedin the odometer/trip meter or themulti-information display are in code.

If you still do not get the indicatedmaintenance done, you will see anegative mileage, for example ‘‘ 15’’blinking. This negative mileagedisplay means you should have donethe indicated maintenance 15 milesago. Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

For an explanation of themaintenance codes, see page .324

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Maintenance

319

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

Touring modelLX and EX models


Press the SELECT/RESET knobfor more than 5 seconds. Themaintenance items code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

Press the SELECT/RESET knobfor about 10 seconds. The engineoil life and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the odometer/trip meter display the next time youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:


Press the SELECT/RESET knobuntil the engine oil life indicator isdisplayed.

3. 4.

1.

2.

On LX and EX models

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeIndicator

320


Press the SEL/RESET knob in theinstrument panel for about 10seconds. The display will changeto the ‘‘CUSTOM SETUP’’ mode.


Press the SEL/RESET button onthe steering wheel until the engineoil life is displayed.

Press the SEL/RESET button onthe steering wheel. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

If you want to cancel resetting,press the INFO button on thesteering wheel. The displaychanges as shown. Press the SEL/RESET button. This cancels theresetting procedure, and thescreen returns to the normaldisplay mode.

3.

1.

2.

4.

5.

On Touring model

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

321


We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

When you select ‘‘RESET’’ andpress the SEL/RESET button, themulti-information display resets asshown above.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.6.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

322


－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

U.S. Vehicles:You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the odometer/trip meter display or the multi-information display.

281

282

334

335

347

337

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

323


＃

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

324

:

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first columnon page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-informationdisplay, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

NOTE:

1 :

323

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in highertransmission temperatures.This requires transmission fluid changes morefrequently than recommended by the MaintenanceMinder. If you regulary drive your vehicle under theseconditions, have the transmission fluid changedevery 30,000 miles (48,000 km).

Replace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under-20°F,29°C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km(Canada)

Inspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterRotate tiresInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

5

1

Main

tenance

Min

der


Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

325

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle.

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km


Maintenance Record

326

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km


Fluid LocationsM

aintenance

327

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

RADIATOR CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR


Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Install the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

328

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Ambient Temperature

API CERTIFICATION SEAL


You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the odometer/trip meter display or on the multi-information display.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the odometer/trip meter display or on the multi-information display. The oil and filtercollect contaminants that can dam-age your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Your vehicle’s engine does notrequire any oil additives. Additivesmay adversely affect engine ortransmission performance anddurability.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

1.

2.

Synthetic Oil Changing the Oil and Filter

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and FilterM

aintenance

329

WASHERDRAIN BOLT


Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

9.

8.

7.

6.

4.

5.

3.

Changing the Oil and Filter

330

OIL FILTER

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.


If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to between theMIN and MAX lines. Inspect thecooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine CoolantM

aintenance

331

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.


When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefullyso you do not spill. Clean up any spillimmediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

Engine Coolant

332

RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK


On Canadian models:

On the Touring model:

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

You will see a‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ messageon the multi-information displaywhen the level is low.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use. Thisreservoir supplies the windshield andrear window washers.

Check the fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge attached to the cap.

69

Windshield WashersM

aintenance

333

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.


Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spills immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick, all the way intothe transmission as shown.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug, and addfluid to bring it to the upper mark.

Remove the dipstick, and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

5.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

334

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK


Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is indicated on a maintenancemessage on the odometer/trip meterdisplay or on the multi-informationdisplay.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendations in themaintenance minder schedule.

6.

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid

Brake Fluid

Maintenance

335

MAX

MIN


－－

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Replace the belt at 60,000 miles(100,000 km) if you regularly driveyour vehicle in one or more of theseconditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance minder schedule.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillimmediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Power Steering Fluid Timing Belt

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

336

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.


Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs, two on each side. Whenreplacing a bulb, handle it by its baseand protect the glass from contactwith your skin or hard objects. If youtouch the glass, clean it withdenatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

The high beam headlight bulb andthe low beam headlight bulb arereplaced the same way.

Open the hood. To change thehigh beam headlight bulb on thepassenger’s side, remove thepower steering fluid reservoirfrom its holder by pulling itstraight up.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or other qualified mechanic.

1.

CONTINUED

Lights

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Maintenance

337

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.


Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Open the hood. Remove thesocket from the headlightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

If you replaced the high beamheadlight bulb on the passenger’sside, reinstall the power steeringfluid reservoir.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

5.

6.

7.

2.

3.

4.2.

1.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn SignalBulb

338

TAB


Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Open the hood. Remove thesocket from the headlightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Lights

Replacing a Front Parking/SideMarker Bulb

Maintenance

339


Use a wrench to remove themounting bolt from the underbodythrough the hole in the splashshield.

Remove the fog light assemblyfrom the bumper by pulling itsinner edge first, then the wholeassembly out of the bumper.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from the foglight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the fog light assemblyinto the bumper. Tighten themounting bolt.

Insert the new bulb into theassembly and turn it one-quarterturn clockwise to lock it in place.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Touring model only

Lights

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

340


Remove the two bolt covers on therear pillar by prying on the bottomedge with a flat-tip screwdriver.Remove the bolts with a Phillips-head screwdriver, and remove thelight assembly from the rear pillar.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: turn signal orbrake/taillight.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Install the rear light assembly inthe rear pillar. Tighten the twobolts. Snap the bolt covers intoposition.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its socket.

2.

3.

5.

6.

7.

1.

4.

Lights

Replacing a Rear Turn Signal orBrake Light Bulb

Maintenance

341


Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push a new bulb into thesocket until it bottoms. Reinstallthe assembly.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Reinstall the light cover.

Determine which bulb is burnedout: taillight or back-up light.

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the middle of the lightcover.Remove the cover by carefullyprying on its edge.

1.

2.

3.

6.

4.

5.

Lights

Replacing a Taillight or Back-upLight Bulb

342


If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchor. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts

Maintenance

343

LOOP


Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard, or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.Front windshield: Raise the driver’sside first, then the passenger’sside.

2.1.

Wiper Blades

344

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the arms.


Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Front windshield: Lower thepassenger’s side first, then thedriver’s side.

Lower the wiper arm against thewindshield.

6.

7.

4.

5.

3.

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

345

BLADEBLADE

REINFORCEMENT


To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

303

LX and EX

EX with Leather and CanadianTouring models

Tire Size

Tire Size

Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving

Front:

Rear:

Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving

Front:

Rear:


Tires

Inflation Guidelines

346

235/65R16 103T33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

235/65R16 103T35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.


CONTINUED

Excessive tread wear.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal; do notrelease air to match the coldpressure. The tires will beunderinflated.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured. Youshould look closely for punctures if atire starts losing pressure.

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold air pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

Tire pressure for high speed drivingis the same as for normal driving.

For additional technical information,see page .

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, ifneeded, to match the recommendedcold tire pressures.

390

U.S. Touring modelTire Size Cold Tire Pressure for

Normal DrivingFront:

Rear:

Tires

Tire Inspection

Maintenance

347

235-710R460A104T

33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )


In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires every 7,500 miles (12,000km). Move the tires to the positionsshown in the chart each time theyare rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Your vehicle’s tires have tread wearindicators molded into the tread.When the tread wears down to thatpoint, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7mm) wide band running across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire. A tire that is this worn givesvery little traction on wet roads. Youshould replace the tire if you can seethe tread wear indicator in three ormore places around the tire.

On some models

Tires

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

348

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.


Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your vehicle canreduce braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy. Using tires of adifferent size or construction cancause the ABS to work inconsistently.

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair. If youreplace just the front tires, move therear tires to the front, and install thenew tires on the rear. Replacing justone tire can seriously affect yourvehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Wheel:

Tire:

LX, and EX models

Touring model

LX, and EX models

Touring model

389

390

Replacing Tires Wheels and Tires

TiresM

aintenance

349

16 x 7J

235/65R16 103T

225 x 460A

235-710R460A 104T

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.


＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

For snow tire information on theTouring model, see page .

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

For tire chain information on theTouring model, see page .

351351

Tires

Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

350

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.


Your vehicle is equipped with theMichelin PAX System which,together with the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS), enablesyou to continue driving even if one ormore of your tires loses its pressure.

The tires and wheels on your vehicleare specially designed for the PAXsystem, and the PAX system isspecifically designed and fine-tunedfor your vehicle.

Because of these reasons, use onlythe wheels and tires designated inthis owner’s manual. Never mix PAXsystem wheels or tires withconventional wheels or tires.

There are no snow tires compatiblewith the PAX system, and not all tirechains are suitable for use on thePAX system tires. To prevent tirechain damage to your PAX systemtire or wheel, ensure that no part ofthe chain contacts the PAX system.

Never use a tire repair agent in aPAX system tire, and never repaira PAX system tire by yourself.Repair or replacement must bedone a Honda dealer or anauthorized Michelin PAX systemdealer.

Do not replace the PAX system tiresand wheels with conventional tiresand wheels. Doing so would disablethe PAX system and the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),and may void your new vehiclewarranty.

If you must continue driving with aflat tire, follow all the proceduresand precautions described on page

.356


Tires

Michelin PAX System Important Precautions

Maintenance

351


－

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

352

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.


If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

Vehicle StorageM

aintenance

353


354


This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

...............Driving with a Flat Tire . 356......................Compact Spare Tire . 359....................Changing a Flat Tire . 360

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 366Nothing Happens or the

Starter Motor Operates........................Very Slowly . 366

The Starter Operates................................Normally . 366................................Jump Starting . 367

..............If the Engine Overheats . 369.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 371..........Charging System Indicator . 371

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 372...........................Readiness Codes . 372

...............Brake System Indicator . 373..................Closing the Moonroof . 374

..............................................Fuses . 375..............................Fuse Locations . 375

......................Emergency Towing . 381

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

355


Your vehicle is equipped with theMichelin PAX system. Since eachMichelin PAX system tire has aninner support ring that allows it tocontinue running without air, it maybe difficult to immediately judgefrom its appearance if a tire ispunctured. Your vehicle is alsoequipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS), and thissystem may be your first detection ofa flat tire. The TPMS monitors the air pressure

of all four tires whenever the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Itwill immediately sense if a tire startsto lose its pressure, and give youwarning with the low tire pressureindicator in the instrument panel anda ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. If the indicator and thewarning message do not come backon again after you inflate the tire tothe specified value (see page ), it

was probably a natural loss of the airpressure and you can continuedriving as before.

If the indicator and the messagecome on again, you probably have aflat tire. In this case, you will see a‘‘PAX SYSTEM WARNING’’message in the multi-informationdisplay.

346


Driving With a Flat Tire

Michelin PAX System

356


With the PAX system tires, you candrive up to about 125 miles (200 km)even if one or more of your tires arepunctured. This allows you to driveto the nearest Honda dealer orauthorized Michelin PAX systemdealer to have the tire(s) repaired.

If you get a flat tire, never try torepair it yourself, and never replace aflat tire with a compact spare tire.

The above message shows that youare driving your vehicle on a flat tire,and should observe the ‘‘RUN FLATDRIVING’’ speed limit of 50 mph(80 km/h). Drive to your nearestHonda dealer or authorized MichelinPAX system dealer, or call the PAXhelp hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE(1-877-729-5473).

If the display changes to the abovemessage, it means that ‘‘RUN FLATDRIVING’’ is nearing the limit, andyou have to stop driving soon. Takeyour vehicle to the nearest Hondadealer or authorized Michelin PAXsystem dealer as soon as possible.

Follow the instructions shown by themulti-information display, and drivevery carefully.

CONTINUED

Driving With a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

357


If you see the above message on themulti-information display, you havereached the limit of run flat driving,and you should stop drivingimmediately. Be aware that if youcontinue to drive, the noise andvibration level from the tire willincrease significantly, and the tiremay no longer be repairable.

Stop driving immediately whenyou see a ‘‘RUN FLAT LIMITSTOP DRIVING’’ message on themulti-information display.Continuous driving after thismessage will make it impossible torepair the tire.

If you cannot find a Honda dealer oran authorized Michelin PAX systemdealer where you are driving, call thePAX help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE(1-877-729-8473).

Call a professional towing servicewho can transport your vehicle onflat-bed equipment. Never tow your

vehicle behind another vehicle with arope or chain. Flat-bed equipment isthe only way to transport yourvehicle.

Do not drive faster than 50 mph(80 km/h).

Drive carefully. Your vehicle mayhandle differently from when thetires are properly inflated,especially when cornering.

In its run flat mode, a PAX systemtire is somewhat noisier than whenit is fully inflated, this is normal.

Although your vehicle is capable ofrun flat driving, you should alwaysobserve the following:

Driving With a Flat Tire


358


Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Turn off the VSA system (seepages and ). Driving withthe compact spare tire mayactivate the VSA.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

Follow these precautions:

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

301 302

All models except U.S. Touring

Compact Spare TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

359

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )


If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake. If you are towing atrailer, unhitch the trailer.

The jack is behind a cover in thecargo area on the driver’s side,and tools are on the back of thecover. Remove the cover bypushing the tabs down and pullingthe cover out.

Turn the jack’s endcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

2.

1. 3.

4.

Changing a Flat Tire

360

JACK

SPARE TIRE

TOOLS

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.


The spare tire is stored behind acover on the sidewall of the cargoarea on the driver’s side.

Remove the cover by holding thetwo handles and pulling the coverout.

Unscrew the wing bolt, and takethe spare tire out of its holder.

If you are changing a rear tire,close the sliding door. Then turnoff the sliding door MAIN switch.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

CONTINUED

On EX model

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

361

WHEEL NUTS


Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.11.

10. 12.On LX model


362

WHEELWRENCH

EXTENSION WHEEL COVER

HAB


Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the bracket from the jackstorage area by unscrewing thebracket mounting bolt.

Put the flat tire in the suppliedvinyl bag. This bag is in the jackstorage area.

You will find a u-shaped slit on thecarpet behind the seat bottom ofthe third seat. Pull up the carpet atthe slit, and remove the plasticscrew with a coin.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

13.

14.

15. 17.

18.

16.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

363

BRACKET

BRACKET MOUNTING BOLT

94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)


Adjust the seat-back of the thirdseat to an upright position. Installthe bracket mounting bolt on theattachment point as shown, andtighten the bolt. Make sure thebracket is securely locked.

Install the flat tire on the bracketwith the inside of the wheel facingtoward you. Install the tiremounting wing bolt to the bracketthrough one of the five wheel nutholes as shown. Poke a hole in thevinyl bag as needed. Secure theflat tire by tightening the wing bolt.

Store the jack in its holder. Tostore the jack, align the locatorstud in the holder with the hole inthe jack base. Turn the jack’s endbracket clockwise to lock it inplace. Store the tools in theholders on the back of the jackstorage cover.

Store the plastic screw in anoticeable place.

Make sure to reinstall the plasticscrew after the flat tire is repairedand installed on the vehicle.

Store the wheel cover in the sparetire storage area.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23. On LX model


364

BRACKET

TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT


Place the flat tire face down on theattachment point. Put the tiremounting wing bolt in theattachment point through one ofthe five wheel nut holes as shown.Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Securethe flat tire by tightening the wingbolt.

Follow step 21 through 24 on page.

When the third seat is folded, theflat tire is secured to the floor on topof the folded seat.

Pull up the U-shaped carpet piece,fold it, and tack the end under thecarpet.

Remove the plastic screw asdescribed in the previousprocedure.

Install the spare tire storage cover.

1.

3.

4.

2.

364

24.


Storing a Flat Tire on the FoldedThird Seat

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

365

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.


Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor Neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights, and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or do not come on atall, the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong withthe electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualifiedtechnician to determine theproblem (seeon page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

367

352

367

293

381

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

If the Engine Won’t Start

366


Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, audio system, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

1.

2.

376

381

129

CONTINUED

EmergencyTowing

Jump Starting To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

367

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.


－

＋

＋

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from the vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

The numbers in the illustrationshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourvehicle’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

4.

6.

7.

5.

3.

Jump Starting

368

BOOSTERBATTERY


The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

369

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.


Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

5.

6.

7.8.

9.

10.

11.

381

381

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

370

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.


Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message inthe multi-information display whenthis indicator comes on.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible and you shouldtake immediate action.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message inthe multi-information display whenthis indicator comes on.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

1.

2.

3.

4.

281

328

381

On Touring model On Touring model

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

371

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.


This indicator may also come onalong with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

If your vehicle battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes at leastthree days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message inthe multi-information display whenthis indicator comes on.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to ON (II), withoutstarting the engine. The malfunctionindicator lamp will come on for 20seconds. If it then goes off, thereadiness codes are set. If it blinks 5times, the readiness codes are notset. If possible, do not take yourvehicle for a state emissions testuntil the readiness codes are set.Refer tofor more information (see page ).

If the indicator remains on, or thefuel cap was not loose or missing,have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator could come onbecause of a loose or missing fuel fillcap. Tighten the cap until it clicks atleast three times. Tightening the capwill not turn the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedays of normal driving.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance,continued operation may causeserious damage.

395

On Touring model

Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

State Emissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Readiness Codes

372

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.


However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when you

turn the ignition switch to ON (II),and as a reminder to check theparking brake. It will stay on if youdo not fully release the parkingbrake.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAindicator come on with the brakesystem indicator, have the vehicleinspected by your dealerimmediately.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display when thisindicator comes on.335

381

On Touring model

EmergencyTowing

Brake System IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

373

U.S. Canada


If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the cargo area.

Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

If you need to close the moonroofmanually, it means the moonroofopening/closing function isdeveloping a problem. Have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

4.

6.

5.

1.

2.

3.

379

Closing the Moonroof

374

ROUND PLUG

SOCKET


The vehicle’s fuses are contained infour fuse boxes (three, if the vehicledoes not have a rear entertainmentsystem).

To open the passenger’s fuse box,pull the right edge of the cover.

The interior fuse boxes are locatedunder the dashboard on the driver’sand passenger’s side.

The primary under-hood fuse box ison the passenger’s side. To open it,push the tabs as shown.

The secondary under-hood fuse boxis behind the primary fuse box.

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

375

DRIVER’S SIDE INTERIOR PASSENGER’S SIDEINTERIOR

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX


Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

through , or the diagram onthe fuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. The diagram forthe interior driver’s side fuse box ison the kick panel below the fuse box.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

1.

2.

3. 4.

378 380

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

376

FUSE

BLOWNFUSE PULLER


If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO feature of thedriver’s window will be disabled. Youshould reset the AUTO feature (seepage ).

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace thefuse with one of the spare fuses ofthe same rating or lower.

5.

6.

162

229

CONTINUED

On EX, and Touring models

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

377

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the properrating f or the circuit, install one witha lower rating.


－

－

＋

＋

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

No. Amps. No.

No. Amps.

Circuits Protected Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

123456789

101112

10 A30 A10 A15 A10 A10 A7.5 A15 A30 A

30 A7.5 A

If equipped

13141516171819202122

23

If equipped

123456

40 A40 A40 A20 A20 A

Left Headlight LowRear Defroster CoilLeft Headlight HighSmall LightsRight Headlight LowRight Headlight HighBack UpFI ECUCondenser FanNot usedCooling FanMG Clutch

20 A30 A40 A15 A30 A30 A30 A40 A40 A70 A

120 A50 A40 A

Horn, StopDefrosterBack UpHazardVSA MotorVSAOption 1Option 2Heater Motor

B AS F/BBattery

B IGI MainPower Window

789

1011

10 A10 A7.5 A

7.5 A

Not UsedLeft Power Sliding DoorRight Power Sliding DoorPower TailgatePremiumAC Inverter

Front Fog LightACMTPMSNot UsedRear Entertainment System

:

:

Fuse Locations

378

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX


－

－－

－

＊＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

No. Amps. No. Amps. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected

123456789

1011121314151617

15 A10 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A10 A7.5 A30 A

20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

18192021222324252627282930313233

15 A15 A10 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

10 A

10 A7.5 A

If equipped

IG PCUIG Fuel PumpIG WasherIG MeterIG SRSIGPLeft Rear WindowRight Rear WindowPassenger’s WindowDriver’s WindowMoonroofNot UsedIG HACNot UsedACCHAC Option

Not UsedIG CoilDaytime Running LightLAFRadioInterior LightsBack UpDoor LockFront Accessory SocketOPDSIG, WiperNot UsedLeft PSD CloserDr Power Seat SlideADJ PedalsDr Power Seat ReclinePower Tailgate Closer

::Canadian models

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

379

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Driver’s Side

Front


－

－

＊

＊

Amps.No. Circuits Protected

30 A

15 A20 A

15 A7.5 A20 A10 A

123456789

If equipped

Rear BlowerNot UsedDBWDoor LockNot UsedHeated SeatInstrument PanelRight Power Sliding DoorAccessory Sockets

:

Fuse Locations

380

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s Side


－

－If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do the following:

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

CONTINUED

Flatbed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle, and it isonly way to transport a Touringmodel.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourvehicle except for the Touringmodel.

Emergency TowingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

381

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must betransported with the f ront wheels of fthe ground.


If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed previously, and leave theignition switched in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock. Makesure the radio and any items pluggedinto the accessory power sockets areturned off so they do not run downthe battery.

Emergency Towing

382

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.


The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 384................................Specifications . 386

DOT Tire Quality Grading.......................(U.S Vehicles) . 388

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 388.................................Treadwear . 388

......................................Traction . 388.............................Temperature . 389

.................................Tire Labeling . 390

.......................Emissions Controls . 392.....................The Clean Air Act . 392

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 392

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 392

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 392

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 393....................PGM-FI System . 393

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 393

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 393

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 393

....................Replacement Parts . 393..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 394

..............State Emissions Testing . 395....Testing of Readiness Codes . 395

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

383


Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

384

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL


The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on the side of the transmission.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

385

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER


－－

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

386

Dimensions

Weights

Capacities

Air Conditioning

Engine

201.0 in (5,106 mm)77.1 in (1,958 mm)

66.8 in (1,697 mm)66.7 in (1,694 mm)118.1 in (3,000 mm)

68.8 in (1,748 mm)70.0 in (1,778 mm)

8,210 lbs (9,815 kg)

LengthWidthHeight

WheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.0.16 US gal (0.6 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

4.8 US qt (4.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

8.5 US qt (8.0 )3.3 US qt (3.1 )5.3 US qt (5.0 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

2.48 US gal (9.4 )1.85 US gal (7.0 )

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

32 34 oz (850 900 g)ND-OIL8

HFC-134a (R-134a)

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC, 6-cylinder,

gasoline engine

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

PKJ16DR-M11IZFR5K-11

10.0 : 1212 cu-in (3,471 cm )

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

FrontRear

1 : LX2 : EX, Touring

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

Approx.21 US gal (80 )

NGK:DENSO:

1

2

1

2


－

＊＊＊

－－

－－－－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－

＊

＊

＊

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

387

Alignment

Tires

Fuses

Battery

Lights

60 W (HB3)12 V12 V

21 W

51 W (HB4)21 W

12 V

12 V

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°0°30’

2°32’

Size

Pressure

235/65R16 103T235-710R460A 104TT135/80D17 103M

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

12 V 35 W

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

21 W

21/5 W21 W

12 V12 V12 V 2 W

12 V

12 V

1.5 CP

3 CP

5 W16 W5 W5 W

Interior

Under-hood

See page 379 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard.See page 380 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.See page 378 or the fuse boxcover.

Capacity12 V12 V

72 AH/20 HR60 AH/5 HR

12 V12 V

8 W4 W (2 CP)

Headlights

Front turn signalFront fog lightsFront turn signal lightsFront parking/side markerlightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsTaillightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightHigh-mount brake lightIndividual map lights

Vanity mirror lightsCargo area lightDoor courtesy light

FrontRearFrontRearFront

U.S. Touring model

Front/Rear

SpareFront

RearSpare

(Amber)

(Amber)

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

1 :2 :3 :

LX, EX, and Canadian Touring models

EX with Leather and Canadian Touring models

FrontRear

HighLow

1

2

3


－The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

388


－The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, C

TechnicalInform

ation

389


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire Identification Number (TIN) isa group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example TIN.

Date of manufacture.

Tire type code.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Max Press The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

Max Load

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

R

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

235

65

103

T

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

390

235/65R16 103T

DOT B97R FW6X 2202


The PAX system tires have differentmarkings from conventional tiremarkings. Following is an example ofPAX system tire size with anexplanation of what each componentmeans.

Tire width in millimeters.

Outside diameter of the tire inmillimeters.

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial)

Nominal diameter at the rimseat in millimeters.

Symmetric

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

A

235

710

R

460

104

T

Tire Labeling (PAX System Tires)

PAX System Tire Labeling

TechnicalInform

ation

391

235-710R460A 104T


＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on pages

and .

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

323 324

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

392


The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

393


The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

394

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERSTHREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER


If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission). Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (approximately 3 minutes).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

CONTINUED

Testing of Readiness Codes

State Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

395


Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T). Do not use the cruisecontrol. When traffic allows, drivefor 90 seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of90 seconds).

Stop the vehicle and turn theignition switch off. Leave thevehicle for 30 minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

State Emissions Testing

396


Customer Service................................Information . 398

....................Warranty Coverages . 399Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 400.....................Authorized Manuals . 401

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

397


Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

384

Customer Service Information

398

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 250-4327


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty manual for exactinformation.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2005 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2005 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

399


If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

400


－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００５

ＨＯＮ

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.

(credit card orders only)

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

401

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

61SHJ00

61SHJ00EL

61SHJ30

31SHJ600

31SHJ700

31SHJM00

31SHJQ00

HON-R

$70.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

Form Description

2005 Honda Odyssey

Service Manual

2005 Honda Odyssey

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2005 Honda Odyssey

Body Repair Manual

2005 Honda Odyssey

Owner’s Manual

2005 Honda Odyssey

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2005 Honda Odyssey

Honda Service History

2005 Honda Odyssey

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication Form Number Price Each

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com


－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

402

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.


CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 284ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.....................................Position) . 130............Accessory Power Sockets . 182

...........................AC Power Outlet . 182....................Additives, Engine Oil . 329

Adjustable Driver’s Foot.........................................Pedals . 169

...............Advanced Airbag System . 29.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 25

..............Air Conditioning System . 188.............Rear A/C Control . 194, 197

.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 191

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 346

.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 278......................................Antifreeze . 331

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 65, 300

...................................Operation . 300..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 229

Anti-theft Steering Column............................................Lock . 130

........................................Armrests . 152...............Audio Controls, Remote . 228

................................Audio System . 199...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 23.Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 124

.............Automatic Speed Control . 264..............Automatic Transmission . 294

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 386...............Checking Fluid Level . 334

.......................................Shifting . 294Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 294................Shift Lever Positions . 294

....................Shift Lock Release . 297

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 63, 371............................Jump Starting . 367

..............................Maintenance . 352............................Specifications . 387

..............................Before Driving . 277..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 22

.........................Beverage Holders . 171..................................Booster Seats . 53

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 300

.............Break-in, New Linings . 278....................Bulb Replacement . 341

...........................................Fluid . 335.......................................Parking . 169

.................System Indicator . 63, 373........................Wear Indicators . 299

.............................Braking System . 299.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 278

Brightness Control, Instruments. 125......................Brights, Headlights . 122

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 342

..............................Brake Lights . 341................Front Parking Lights . 339

........Front Side Marker Lights . 339...........Front Turn Signal Light . 338

.................................Headlights . 337

.........................Rear Bulbs . 341, 342............Rear Turn Signal Light . 341

............................Specifications . 387..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 337

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I


＊

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 4, 60

..............Daytime Running Lights . 125Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 69.................................Dead Battery . 367

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 400..............Defogger, Rear Window . 126..............Defrosting the Windows . 192

....................................Dimensions . 386.............Dimming the Headlights . 122

................................Cancel Button . 266............................Capacities Chart . 386

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56..........................Cargo Area Light . 185

.................................Cargo Hooks . 289....................Cargo, How to Carry . 286

......................................Cargo Net . 289..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

.........................................CD Care . 221...................................CD Changer . 215

.......CD Changer Error Message . 222.......................................CD Player . 212

...............................Center Pocket . 181...................................Center Tray . 171

........................Certification Label . 384.................................Chains, Tires . 350

Changing Oil........................................How to . 329......................................When to . 315

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 360...Charging System Indicator . 63, 371

............Checklist, Before Driving . 292................Childproof Door Locks . 138

.....................................Child Safety . 36..............................Booster Seats . 53

...................................Child Seats . 43.....Important Safety Reminders . 40

..........................................Infants . 41..........................Larger Children . 51

.........................................LATCH . 45......................Risks with Airbags . 37

.............................Small Children . 42.........................................Tethers . 51

........Where Should A Child Sit? . 37.......................................Child Seats . 43

......LATCH Anchorage System . 45..........Tether Anchorage Points . 50

Cleaning...................................Seat Belts . 343

...............Climate Control System . 193..............................................Clock . 227

.....................Code, Audio System . 229........................CO in the Exhaust . 392

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 293......................Compact Spare Tire . 359

...............Consumer Information . 398.............Controls, Instruments and . 59

....................Conversation Mirror . 174

Coolant........................................Adding . 331

....................................Checking . 282.........................Proper Solution . 331

...................Temperature Gauge . 71Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 392................Cruise Control Indicator . 69............Cruise Control Operation . 264

...................................Cup Holders . 171.............Customer Service Office . 398

Index

C

D

II


CONTINUED

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 334

..................................Engine Oil . 281........................Directional Signals . 122

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 299.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 330

Doors............Locking and Unlocking . 137

..................Lockout Prevention . 137..............Manual Sliding Doors . 142

..............................Monitor Light . 67....................Power Door Locks . 137

.................Power Sliding Doors . 142..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 388

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7Driver’s Seat Position Memory

........................................System . 161...........................................Driving . 291

....................................Economy . 283....................DVD Error Message . 259

...................................DVD Player . 230

..............................Economy, Fuel . 283

..................................Emergencies . 355.............Battery, Jump Starting . 367...........Brake System Indicator . 373

................Changing a Flat Tire . 360.....Charging System Indicator . 371

..................Checking the Fuses . 376..............Closing the Moonroof . 374

...........Driving with a Flat Tire . 356.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 126

............................Jump Starting . 367.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 371...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 372

..................Overheated Engine . 369.......................................Towing . 381

.........................Emergency Brake . 169....................Emergency Flashers . 126

......................Emergency Towing . 381.......................Emissions Controls . 392

.............Emissions Testing, State . 395Engine

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 71..............Engine Speed Limiter . 296

.........................If It Won’t Start . 366Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 63, 372........Oil Pressure Indicator . 63, 371

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 328...............................Overheating . 369

............................Specifications . 387.......................................Starting . 293

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 392...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56

Exhaust Gas Recirculation........................................System . 393

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 20

...................................Fan, Interior . 189Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 187....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 279

......................................Filters, Oil . 329...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 126

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 360.....................................Floor Mats . 343

.......................Floor Storage Area . 177

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III


Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 334

..........................................Brake . 335..........................Power Steering . 336

................Windshield Washers . 121FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 205.................Folding the Third Seat . 158

........................Four-way Flashers . 126............................Front Airbags . 11, 27

......................................Front Seat . 148....................................Adjusting . 149

.......................................Heaters . 160

...................................Airbags . 11, 27.................................................Fuel . 278

......................Fill Door and Cap . 279...........................................Gauge . 71

................Octane Requirement . 278....................................Refueling . 279

........................Reserve Indicator . 68.....................Fuses, Checking the . 376

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 283

.........................................Gasoline . 278...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 68

...........................................Gauge . 71................Octane Requirement . 278

....................................Refueling . 279................Gas Station Procedures . 279

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 71

...............................................Fuel . 71...............................Speedometer . 71

.................................Tachometer . 71GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 307GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

.......................................Rating) . 307......................................Glove Box . 180

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight.......................................Rating) . 307

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 337............Hazard Warning Flashers . 126

.....................................Headlights . 122........................................Aiming . 337

............Automatic Lighting Off . 124

.........Daytime Running Lights . 125..................High Beam Indicator . 69

.......................Reminder Chime . 122........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 337

.................................Turning on . 122...................................Headphones . 260

............................Head Restraints . 152...............................Heated Mirror . 168

...................................Heater, Seat . 160.....................Heating and Cooling . 188

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 293...............High-Low Beam Switch . 122

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 267

.......................Hood, Opening the . 280...........................................Horn . 5, 120

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 384Ignition

............................................Keys . 128.........................................Switch . 130

............Timing Control System . 393......................Immobilizer System . 129

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8

Index

H

I

G

IV


CONTINUED................................................Keys . 128

.........................................Indicators . 63......ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 65, 300

Brake (Parking and Brake...........................System) . 63, 373

................Charging System . 63, 371.............................Cruise Control . 69

DRL (Daytime Running.....................................Lights) . 69.....................................Fog Light . 69

.............................Fuel Economy . 70...................................High Beam . 69

.......Key (Immobilizer System) . 67.....................................Lights On . 66......................................Low Fuel . 68

................Low Oil Pressure . 63, 371......................Low Tire Pressure . 66

...............Maintenance Required . 70.....................Side Airbag Off . 33, 64

.........................................SRS . 32, 64.........................System Message . 70

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 68

Vehicle Stability Assist..........................(VSA) System . 65

............................VSA Activation . 65..............................Washer Level . 69

..................Individual Map Lights . 184...............................Infant Restraint . 41

......................................Infant Seats . 43......LATCH Anchorage System . 45

...........................Lower Anchors . 45..........Tether Anchorage Points . 50

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 346

...................In-Floor Storage Area . 177.................................Inside Mirror . 167

.............................Inspection, Tire . 347........................Instrument Panel . 4, 60

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 125....................Integrated Sunshade . 173

...............................Interior Lights . 183........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 361.......................................Jack, Tire . 360

................................Jump Starting . 367

.......................Label, Certification . 384...............Lane Change, Signaling . 122

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 22...........LATCH Anchorage System . 45

.....................................Lazy Susan . 179....................Light Control Switch . 183

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 337

.......................................Indicator . 63.......................................Interior . 183.......................................Parking . 122

................................Turn Signal . 122............................Load Limits . 287, 306

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 130Locks

.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 130............................Fuel Fill Door . 279

..................................Glove Box . 180..................Lockout Prevention . 137

...............................Power Door . 137.............................Sliding Doors . 142

......................................Tailgate . 138

Index

J

K

L

IND

EX

V


........................Low Coolant Level . 282.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 68

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 63, 371................................Lower Anchors . 45

..........................Lower Glove Box . 180...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 386

...........Luggage Net (Cargo Net) . 289

...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 286

..................................Maintenance . 313................................Minder . 315-324

...Owner Maintenance Checks . 323.................................Record . 325-326

......................Required Indicator . 70..........................................Safety . 314

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 63, 372...................Manual Sliding Doors . 142

...............................Meters, Gauges . 71..................Michilen PAX System . 356

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 167.................................Modifications . 284

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 284.......................................Moonroof . 166

Moving the Second Row Bucket.............................................Seat . 154

.............Multi-Information Display . 74

...................Neutral Gear Position . 295..................New Vehicle Break-in . 278

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 384

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 278.........................................Odometer . 72

...............................Odometer, Trip . 72Oil

........................Change, How to . 329......................Change, When to . 315......................Checking Engine . 281..............Pressure Indicator . 63, 371

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 328

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 130Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 392

............................Outside Mirrors . 167....................Overheating, Engine . 369

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 323.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 278

............Panel Brightness Control . 125........................Park Gear Position . 295

...........................................Parking . 298...............................Parking Brake . 169

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 63, 373

...............................Parking Lights . 122................Parking Sensor System . 271

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 298

....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 33...................................PAX System . 356

.............................PGM-FI System . 393........................Power Door Locks . 137

Power Sliding Doors.......................................Indicator . 67...................................Operation . 142

.....................................Switches . 143...............Power Socket Locations . 182

..............................Power Tailgate . 139

Index

M

N

O

P

VI


＊

CONTINUED

............................Power Windows . 163.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 20.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 14

...Additional Safety Precautions . 20.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 20

........................Protecting Children . 36.......................Protecting Infants . 41

.......Protecting Larger Children . 51.........Protecting Small Children . 42

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 50

.............................Using LATCH . 45

...................Radiator Overheating . 369.............Radio/CD Sound System . 199

...........................Readiness Codes . 372............Rear Audio Control Panel . 234

...............................Rear A/C Unit . 194........Rear Entertainment System . 230

Rear Lights, Bulb......................Replacement . 341, 342

...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 275..........................Rear View Mirror . 167

...............Rear Window Defogger . 126

Rear Window Wiper and.......................................Washer . 122

.....Reclining the Seat Backs . 150, 151.........Reclining the Second Seats . 150

..............Reclining the Third Seat . 150.......................Reminder Indicators . 64

................Remote Audio Controls . 228

................Remote Control (RES) . 257.....................Remote Transmitter . 131

Removable Second Row......................................Console . 176

........Removing the Second Seats . 155Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 329..........................................Fuses . 376

................................Light Bulbs . 337

................................Timing Belt . 336...........................................Tires . 349

.............................Wiper Blades . 344Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 23Reserve Tank,

.................Engine Coolant . 282, 331..............Retractable Center Tray . 171

..................Reverse Gear Position . 295......................................Roof Rack . 288

................................Rotation, Tire . 348

................................Safety Belts . 10, 22.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 400

.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.............Safety Labels, Location of . 57

...............................Safety Messages . ii...................................Seat Belts . 10, 22

...............Additional Information . 22Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 23.....................................Cleaning . 343

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22................................Maintenance . 23

Reminder Indicator and................................Beeper . 22, 64

................................Replacement . 23...................System Components . 22

...............Use During Pregnancy . 20...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16

..................................Seat Heaters . 160

Index

S

R

IND

EX

VII


＊

.....................................Tachometer . 71..........................................Tailgate . 138

...............................Opening the . 138...................Open Monitor Light . 67

..Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 341, 342

...............................................Seats . 148......................Adjustments . 149, 151

..........Drivers Lumbar Support . 152.............Folding the Third Seat . 158

........................Head Restraints . 152Installing the Stowable Second

...............Row Plus-One Seat . 156.....Manual Height Adjustment . 150

....................Passenger Seating . 148.......Reclining the Second Seat . 150

..........Reclining the Third Seat . 150....Removing the Second Seats . 155

.....................Third Seat Access . 153............................Security System . 263

SensorsFront Passenger’s Weight

.....................................Sensors . 29....Driver’s Seat Position Sensor . 29

...............................Serial Number . 384...........................Service Intervals . 315...........................Service Manual . 401

...........Service Station Procedure . 279..........................Setting the Clock . 227

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 294........................Shift Lock Release . 297

..............................Side Airbags . 11, 30

..........................Off Indicator . 33, 64Side Marker Lights, Bulb

..............................Replacement . 339.............................Signaling Turns . 122

.................................Sliding Doors . 142.....................................Snow Tires . 350

................................Sound System . 199Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 359............................Specifications . 387

....................................Spark Plugs . 387....................Specifications Charts . 386

................................Speed Control . 264...................................Speedometer . 71

..........SRS, Additional Information . 25...Additional Safety Precautions . 35

.............................Airbag Service . 34..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32

How Your Airbags............................Work . 27, 30, 32

........................SRS Components . 25.............................SRS Indicator . 32, 64

..START (Ignition Key Position) . 130.......................Starting the Engine . 293

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 293

................With a Dead Battery . 367..............State Emissions Testing . 395

........Steam Coming from Engine . 369Steering Wheel

................................Adjustment . 127...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 130

.................................Buttons . 75, 228...................Stereo Sound System . 199....................Storing Your Vehicle . 353

Stowable Second Row Plus-One.............................................Seat . 156

........................Sunglasses Holder . 174........................................Sun Visor . 175

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 34

.........................SRS Indicator . 32, 64...................System Components . 25

..................................Synthetic Oil . 329

Index

T

VIII


＊

CONTINUED

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 355Technical Descriptions

.....Emissions Control Systems . 392Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 393.......................Temperature Gauge . 71

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 198...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 23

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 50............................Theft Protection . 229

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 393................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 127

..........................Time, Setting the . 227....................................Timing Belt . 336....................................Tire Chains . 350

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 360...............................................Tires . 346

..............................Air Pressure . 346...................................Balancing . 348

.........................Checking Wear . 347..........................Compact Spare . 359

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 388......................................Inflation . 346

..................................Inspection . 347.....................................Labeling . 390...................................Replacing . 349

......................................Rotating . 348...........................................Snow . 350

............................Specifications . 387................................Tire Chains . 350

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 360Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 306................Emergency Wrecker . 381

....Equipment and Accessories . 308.....................Weight Limit . 287, 306.............................Trailer Loading . 308

......................Trailer Towing Tips . 311Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 334...........................Fluid Selection . 334

..............Identification Number . 384.............Shifting the Automatic . 294

.....................................Treadwear . 388

.................................Trip Meter . 72, 77..................................Turn Signals . 122

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 355

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 388

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 278...........................Upper Glove Box . 180

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 330

................................Vanity Mirror . 176.........Vehicle Capacity Load . 287, 306

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 386....Vehicle Identification Number . 384

.............................Vehicle Storage . 353.....................................Ventilation . 191

.................................................VIN . 384..................................Viscosity, Oil . 328

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 57

..................Warranty Coverages . 399Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 333............................Level Indicator . 69

...................................Operation . 121

Index

U

V

W

IND

EX

IX


＊

Wheels.............Adjusting the Steering . 127............Alignment and Balance . 348

..........................Compact Spare . 359......................................Wrench . 362

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 163

................Operating the Power . 163.........................Rear, Defogger . 126

Windshield.....................................Cleaning . 121...................................Defroster . 192

.....................................Washers . 121Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 344...................................Operation . 121

Rear Windshield Wiper and...................................Washer . 122

..................Wireless Headphones . 260....................................Worn Tires . 347

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 381

: U.S. only

Index

X


Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )Rear:

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )Front:

Front:35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

Rear:35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

Compact Spare Tire:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

334

336

335

328

LX, EX, and U.S. Touring models:

EX with Leather and CanadianTouring models:

21 US gal (80 )


Documents

2005 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents